Page 1 KX-NS300CN Model No. Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product. Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety (Page 14)" before using this product.
Page 2 Introduction About this Programming Manual The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using Web Maintenance Console. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Overview Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
Page 3 PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. • Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice. • In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-NS300CN) is omitted unless necessary. PC Programming Manual...
Page 4: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Overview ....................13 Introduction ........................14 1.1.1 For Your Safety ......................14 1.1.2 Introduction ........................16 1.1.3 Entering Characters .......................17 PC Programming ......................21 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console ................21 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode ................24 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode ..........29 2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console .........31 Introduction ........................32...
Page 5 Table of Contents Tool—Export ........................86 Tool—Screen Customise ....................87 Tool—UM Data Backup ....................88 6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup ..............89 6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup ..............90 Tool—UM Data Restore ....................91 6.10 Tool—UM Backup History ....................93 6.11 Tool—DXDP All OUS .......................94 6.12 Tool—Contact information .....................95 6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting ....................96 6.14...
Page 6 Table of Contents 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting .........135 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List ........136 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance ..........139 7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance ................140 8 Users .....................141 Users—User Profiles ....................142 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting ..............144 Users—Add User ......................148 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User ...................148 8.2.2...
Page 7 Table of Contents 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type ...302 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port ....308 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type .....311 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port ....317 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type ....326 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal ...
Page 8 Table of Contents 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group ............453 11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group ............454 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings ......454 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority ....460 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification ....461 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan .......465 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign ........................467...
Page 9 Table of Contents 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial ......543 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button ....544 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ......................552 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button ......553 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send ..........................554 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table ....555...
Page 10 Table of Contents 16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting ......651 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority ..........652 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier ..............653 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception ........656 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG .........657 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network ...........659 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table ..........660 17.2...
Page 11 Table of Contents 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement ......................780 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters ........782 25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ..........799 25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ................800 26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ..........801 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ..............802 27 Network Service ...................805 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports ..............806...
Page 12 Table of Contents PC Programming Manual...
Page 13: Overview
Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX. PC Programming Manual...
Page 14: Introduction
1.1.1 For Your Safety 1.1 Introduction 1.1.1 For Your Safety To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions. The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is operated or handled improperly.
Page 15 Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre. CAUTION •...
Page 16: Introduction
1.1.2 Introduction 1.1.2 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system programming".
Page 17: Entering Characters
1.1.3 Entering Characters 1.1.3 Entering Characters The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Note For NE models, the tables differ depending on the Area Code selected in Easy Setup.
Page 18 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 2 (For NE model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 19 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 3 (For RU/UC model) PC Programming Manual...
Page 20 1.1.3 Entering Characters Table 4 (For Greece) PC Programming Manual...
Page 21: Pc Programming
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console 1.2 PC Programming 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using Web Maintenance Console. Web Maintenance Console is accessed through a Web browser running on a networked PC. This section describes how to set up and access Web Maintenance Console.
Page 22 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console Recommended Specification Hard Disk 10 GB available space Copyright for MD5 This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the RFC1321 (MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm). Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved. Licence to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc.
Page 23 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console Note • If entering "http://kx-ns300.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown. • If it takes a long time to connect when 223.0.0.1 is entered, configure a static IP address to the LAN connected to the PC.
Page 24: Pc Programming Using Off-Line Mode
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode PC Programming is performed by connecting to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console, which is also known as On-line mode. However, as certain programming requires installed cards to be set to out of service (OUS), or requires system settings to be changed, some programming cannot be performed while the PBX is in use.
Page 25 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode Off-line Web Maintenance Console Programme Launcher Note Off-line Web Maintenance Console cannot be used when the PBX Web Manager for Unified PC Maintenance Console (for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs) is running on the PC. To disable the PBX Web Manager: In the Unified PC Maintenance Console launcher, click Option®PBX Web Manager.
Page 26 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode Opening an Existing System Data File This operation will load a PBX settings system data file from your PC for programming in Off-line mode. The system data file can be a file created earlier using Off-line Web Maintenance Console, or a system data file downloaded from a PBX.
Page 27 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode VoIP Test Tool Click the VoIP Test Tool button to launch the VoIP Test Tool. This tool is identical to the VoIP Test Tool included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs. IP Terminal Utility Click the IP Terminal button to launch the IP Terminal setup utility.
Page 28 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode Notice • If the PC running the Off-line Web Maintenance Console is shut down, the Web browser is closed, or the user logs out, any changes that have not been saved will be lost. Be sure to regularly save data while programming.
Page 29: Editing And Printing Terminal Labels In Off-Line Mode
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode Follow the procedure below to print key label sheets for use with your system’s extensions and DSS consoles. In On-line mode, export PBX system data to your PC, and then open the exported data in Off-line mode. In On-line mode, use the File Transfer PBX to PC utility to save your system’s data and settings to your PC.
Page 30 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode PC Programming Manual...
Page 31: Introduction Of Web Maintenance Console
Section 2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to programme the PBX. PC Programming Manual...
Page 32: Introduction
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts User account levels Access to Web Maintenance Console requires a login name and password, which are assigned to accounts in the PBX. Also, access to Web Maintenance Console is controlled by different levels of authorisation. The Installer level is the highest authorisation level.
Page 33 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts Level Login Name Password Installer INSTALLER 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). For an initialised PBX that has not yet been set up, the default Installer level password is "1234". You will be prompted to choose a new password for the Installer level account when the Easy Setup Wizard is run (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 34: Access Levels
2.1.2 Access Levels 2.1.2 Access Levels Access to menu options within Web Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the level of the account and the current programming mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction). When a menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu option, for example: "This option is only available at Installer level."...
Page 35 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line ü ü Import®V-IPGW DN2IP Import®V-SIPGW Settings ü ü ü ü Import®V-SIPGW Provider ü ü ü ü Export®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü Export®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü Export®ARS - Leading Digit ü...
Page 36 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Off-line On-line File View ü File Delete ü Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü Error Log ü ü Syslog ü Web-MC Event Log ü ü UM System Log ü...
Page 37: Logging In To Web Maintenance Console
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console (see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console), the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered. If this is the first time to log in to Web Maintenance Console, and the PBX is in its initialised, factory default state, you must log in using the Installer level account to begin the Easy Setup Wizard (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Page 38: Easy Setup Wizard
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will configure the mandatory settings required for the PBX. When you log in to Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialised, factory default state, the Easy Setup Wizard for that PBX will launch automatically.
Page 39: Card Status
2.1.5 Card Status 2.1.5 Card Status Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card status changes can be performed only in On-line mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction).
Page 40: Extension Number Setting
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button.
Page 41: Logout
2.2 Logout 2.2 Logout To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the button to end the programming session and return to the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary memory (DRAM) of the PBX to the System Memory. To logout Click the button.
Page 42: Frequently Asked Questions (Faq)
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics: Title Description Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console. Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Page 43 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Card Status The status of a new card will not change to "INS". • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the maximum supported by the PBX? • Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install"...
Page 44 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown Forced De-registration of 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station. I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows the old extension number.
Page 45 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Select 3-digits for default value of Numbering Plan in the Easy Setup Wizard. If you want to change to a 3-digit extension numbering plan after the PBX system is already running using a 4-digit extension numbering plan, follow the procedure below. There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main: Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit.
Page 46 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number? • Perform the following steps: Clear the Leading Number cell. Click Apply. No. of Additional Digits to "None". Click Apply. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
Page 47 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: • A feature number • An extension •...
Page 48 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Setting Features How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk? • From the 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required.
Page 49 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Perform the following steps: On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen, enter the floating extension number you chose for the ICD group in the Floating Extension Number cell. Click Apply. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, select the ICD group you created from the ICD Group No.
Page 50 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) PC Programming Manual...
Page 51: Web Maintenance Console Home Screen
Section 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen This section explains how to setup the main PBX and other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 52: Home Screen
3.1 Home Screen 3.1 Home Screen When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the home screen is displayed. For information about connecting to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console. The home screen of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below: Logged in Account Level The logged in account level is displayed.
Page 53 3.1 Home Screen Web Maintenance Console Features Clicking these buttons provides features for Web Maintenance Console, as follows: Button Description Clicking this button will save any changes made to settings to the System Memory. Programming changes that are not saved will be lost if the PBX is reset or is turned off.
Page 54 3.1 Home Screen Maintenance Screen Tree View Items Item Primary Functions Status • Check the status of the PBX’s system hardware • Check the status of PBX equipment (PSs, CSs, etc.) • Check the status of extensions used by the Unified Messaging system For details, see Section 4 Status.
Page 55 3.1 Home Screen The standard buttons are as follows: Button Function Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory (DRAM) and closes the current screen. Cancel Abandons changes and closes the current screen. Apply Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory (DRAM) and remains on the same screen.
Page 56 3.1 Home Screen PC Programming Manual...
Page 57: Status
Section 4 Status This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 58: Status-Equipment Status
4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS 4.1 Status—Equipment Status 4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS Information is provided about the status of the UPS device and the connection to the PBX • UPS Connection Status Displays if the UPS system is connected or not connected. If a UPS system is connected, the information below will be displayed for the UPS system.
Page 59: Status-Equipment Status-Cs Information
4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information 4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode and requires that the target V-IPCS4 card be set to INS status. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description...
Page 60: Status-Equipment Status-Ps Information
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS). This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description PS No.
Page 61: Status-Equipment Status-Um Port Status
4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status 4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status The UM Port status screen displays each port’s status and number for the Unified Messaging system. The screen will be updated every 30 seconds. Each port’s status will be displayed in one of the following ways: •...
Page 62: Status-Equipment Status-Usb
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB USB Mount Status indicates if a USB memory device is connected to the PBX. There is also an Unmount button. • Mounted: A USB memory device is connected to the PBX. Before removing the USB memory device from the PBX, click Unmount.
Page 63: System Control
Section 5 System Control This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen when programming using Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 64: System Control-Program Update
5.1 System Control—Program Update 5.1 System Control—Program Update The programme files for the following hardware components can be updated with the Program Update feature. Each file must be named as indicated in the table to be recognised by the KX-NS300. Hardware that can be updated using Program Update Programme Type Target of Update...
Page 65: System Control-Program Update-Download Program File
5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File Software updates for PBX hardware components can be downloaded to the PBX. Manual and automatic methods are available. Programme downloading can be performed only in On-line mode. Note •...
Page 66 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File • Check only: The specified download server is checked at the specified times. If an e-mail is entered in Email notification, an e-mail notification is sent when updated files have been discovered. Note If Check only is selected, updated files will have to be downloaded manually (see the manual procedure above).
Page 67: System Control-Program Update-Update Program File
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File Once updated programme files have been downloaded and are stored on a PBX, they can be used to update the system files of the PBX. The update process can be set to be automatically performed at a specified time, or the update process can be carried out manually.
Page 68: System Control-Program Update-Plug And Update
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update The Plug and Update feature allows IP-PTs to be automatically updated to the latest software version when they are registered to the PBX. When Plug and Update is enabled, the version number of the system software stored on the SD Memory Card or USB memory is compared to the system software currently in the IP-PT, after the IP-PT has been registered to the PBX.
Page 69: System Control-Moh
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install 5.2 System Control—MOH 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install Sound files on the programmer’s PC can be installed to each PBX for use as Music on Hold (MOH). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click Browse and select a WAV file to install as an MOH file. Only one file may be installed at a time. As uploading the file to the PBX may require some time, a time can be set in Time Set.
Page 70: System Control-Moh-Delete
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete 5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete MOH files that are occupying BGM numbers can be deleted. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. In BGM No., specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from. Specify "All" to delete the data saved in all BGM numbers.
Page 71: System Control-Moh-Status / Backup
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup 5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup MOH files stored on a PBX can be downloaded to the user’s PC. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The MOH files saved to the PBX will be listed. Click Backup for the file you would like to back up. One file can be backed up at a time.
Page 72: System Control-System Reset
5.3 System Control—System Reset 5.3 System Control—System Reset When programming changes or other changes to PBX settings require a system reset, this command allows a reset to be performed remotely from Web Maintenance Console. When the system is reset, any settings not saved to the System Memory are lost. A backup should be performed before the reset to ensure no data is lost.
Page 73: System Control-System Shutdown
5.4 System Control—System Shutdown 5.4 System Control—System Shutdown In order to turn off the power to a PBX, it must first be issued a shutdown command using Web Maintenance Console. Follow the procedure below to prepare a PBX for system shutdown. When the system is shut down, any settings not saved to the System Memory are lost.
Page 74 5.4 System Control—System Shutdown PC Programming Manual...
Page 75: Tool
Section 6 Tool This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 76: Tool-System Data Backup
6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB 6.1 Tool—System Data Backup 6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a USB memory device inserted into the PBX’s USB port. At a later time, the USB memory device can be used to restore the backed up system data to a PBX. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 77: Tool-System Data Backup-Backup To Nas
6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS • The USB memory device is removed from the USB port of the PBX during the restoration process. • The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
Page 78: Tool-Ndss Link Data Clear
6.2 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear 6.2 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the QSIG network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
Page 79: Tool-Call Pickup For My Group
6.3 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group 6.3 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group Allows you to automatically configure settings in 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0". To activate this tool When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
Page 80: Tool-Extension List View
6.4 Tool—Extension List View 6.4 Tool—Extension List View Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature. The types that can be displayed are as follows: Type Detail...
Page 81: Tool-Import
6.5 Tool—Import 6.5 Tool—Import Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 6.6 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Page 82 6.5 Tool—Import Related programming: 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table ARS - Leading Digit Data Type Import Destination Location Location Leading Number Leading Digit Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number ARS - Except Code Data Type...
Page 83 6.5 Tool—Import Quick Dial* Data Type Import Destination Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial SIP Extension Data Type Import Destination Location Extension Number Extension Number Password* Password Related programming: 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property V-IPGW GW Settings Data Type Import Destination...
Page 84 6.5 Tool—Import Data Type Import Destination T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Redundancy T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages for T.30 messages T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data...
Page 85 6.5 Tool—Import Note Before importing PS registration settings, be sure to de-register any PSs already registered to the KX-NS300 PBX. To import system data From the Tool tree menu, select Import, and then click the type of data to import. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
Page 86: Tool-Export
6.6 Tool—Export 6.6 Tool—Export Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see 6.5 Tool—Import) to update another PBX. Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
Page 87: Tool-Screen Customise
6.7 Tool—Screen Customise 6.7 Tool—Screen Customise Allows you to specify which Setup and Maintenance screens can be accessed in the User (Administrator) account level. This option is only available at Installer level. Selected check boxes will be displayed in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the User (Administrator) account level.
Page 88: Tool-Um Data Backup
6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup The UM Data Backup tool can be used to backup and restore Unified Messaging (UM) data. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following voice data can be backed up or restored as individual files. The data can be backed up to a USB memory device connected to the PBX or a NAS.
Page 89: Tool-Um Data Backup-Manual Backup
6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup 6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup Use this procedure to manually back up Unified Messaging system data. For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup. To back up system prompts, select the check box next to System Prompts and select the check boxes of the items you want to back up.
Page 90: Tool-Um Data Backup-Scheduled Backup
6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup 6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup You can schedule backups in advance. The Unified Messaging system will automatically back up the selected data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device or NAS connected to the PBX. (Scheduled backups cannot be made to a local PC.) For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup.
Page 91: Tool-Um Data Restore
6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore 6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore Follow the procedure below to restore data backed up using the UM Data Backup tool. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. For more information about the UM Data Backup tool, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup. You can restore data from a USB memory device connected to the PBX or from a file on your local PC.
Page 92 6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore • The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero). • The backup file names stored on the USB memory device should not be changed. If the file names are changed, the system may not be able to detect which backup files correspond to which UM data items.
Page 93: Tool-Um Backup History
6.10 Tool—UM Backup History 6.10 Tool—UM Backup History The following records for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen: • Description • Parameters • Completion Status • Date & Time • Total Elapsed Time (HH:MM:SS) This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. PC Programming Manual...
Page 94: Tool-Dxdp All Ous
6.11 Tool—DXDP All OUS 6.11 Tool—DXDP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously for the PBX. To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS for the PBX Access Tool—DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view. Click OK.
Page 95: Tool-Contact Information
6.12 Tool—Contact information 6.12 Tool—Contact information Dealers can set contact information for the user of the PBX here. When users select this tree menu item, this information will be displayed for the user’s reference. Input the following information, and then click OK. •...
Page 96: Tool-Ut Option Setting
6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting 6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting Option settings can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones on a system-wide level. Note The following apply when programming in On-line mode only: • To set these parameters, all installed V-UTEXT8 cards must first be set to OUS. For details, see 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 97: Tool-Url Information
6.14 Tool—URL Information 6.14 Tool—URL Information The URL address for downloading the IMAP tool can be specified on this screen. This URL address will be used for the Unified Messaging Plug in download button displayed to users when they view the Unified Message tab of their profile in the User menu.
Page 98: Tool-Svm (Simplified Voice Message)
6.15.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage 6.15 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message) 6.15.1 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording Deletes all voice messages recorded by the SVM feature. To delete SVM recording data Access Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording. Click OK.
Page 99: Utility
Section 7 Utility This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 100: Utility-Diagnosis
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis 7.1 Utility—Diagnosis 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems. If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer. When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are to be used again.
Page 101: Utility-Diagnosis-Ping
7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To perform a Ping test Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
Page 102: Utility-File
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2 Utility—File 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX Copies PBX system data files from the connected PC to the System Memory installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files in System Memory Card are overwritten. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. To install new main system data that has been copied to the PBX, use the System Reset utility (see 5.3 System Control—System Reset) for DFSYS files.
Page 103: Utility-File-File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC Copies system data files from the System Memory and SD card installed in the PBX to the connected PC. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. The files that can be downloaded from the System Memory and SD card are as follows: File Name File Type...
Page 104: Utility-File-File View
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View 7.2.3 Utility—File—File View Displays a list of files in System Memory and SD card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed. This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the in the System Memory and SD card. The effective date, PFMPR-ID, activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen.
Page 105: Utility-File-File Delete
7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete 7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete Allows you to delete files from the System Memory. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. The DFSYS system file cannot be deleted by this utility. Note Programme files cannot be deleted if the Program Update feature’s timed update is set, or if an update is currently being performed.
Page 106: Utility-File-Message File Transfer Pc To Pbx
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the System Memory. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary. If the location specified already contains an OGM, it will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message.
Page 107: Utility-File-Message File Transfer Pbx To Pc
7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the System Memory to the PC. This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode. To transfer OGMs to the PC From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
Page 108: Utility-Log
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log 7.3 Utility—Log 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Collects and displays system error information. Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 109 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log Sub Code Description Slot Type For physical slots (including physical slots of Expansion Units) – " " (blank) For KX-NS300 virtual slots – "*" (asterisk) Shelf Number • – KX-NS300 unit: 1 – Expansion Unit: 2–4 – Non-PBX process: 5 Slot Number When X is not 5...
Page 110: Utility-Log-Syslog
7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog Displays a log of system events. Each entry in the log includes the following information: • Type: Describes the type of system event. • Date: The date and time the system event occurred. • Message: Details about the system event. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 111: Utility-Log-Web-Mc Event Log
7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log 7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log The Web-MC Event Log retains information about user interaction with Web Maintenance Console. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The items displayed on screen are as follows: Item Description Date The date of the event.
Page 112: Utility-Log-Um System Log
7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log 7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log You can export a log of events from the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Click OK to export a UM System Log file. Click Save to save the data to a local file.
Page 113: Utility-Log-Call Control Log
7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log Collects and displays Logical Partitioning Call Control Log information. To show the setting change information for the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Condition button. To show the call restriction status of the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Status button. Condition Item Description...
Page 114: Utility-Monitor/Trace
7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace 7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace 7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace This utility collects protocol trace data from the PRI card, and displays it on the PC. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target PRI card be set to INS status.
Page 115: Utility-Monitor/Trace-V-Ipgw Protocol Trace
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace 7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW4 card. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPGW4 card be set to INS status. To save trace data to the System Memory From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW Protocol Trace.
Page 116: Utility-Monitor/Trace-V-Sipgw Protocol Trace
7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace The trace data of protocol activity can be collected from the V-SIPGW4 card and saved to a PC using the V-SIPGW Protocol Trace. This option requires that the target V-SIPGW4 card be set to INS status. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Page 117: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Cs Status Monitor
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor This utility monitors the status of CSs. CSs receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs that are in INS status. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Page 118: Utility-Monitor/Trace-Um System Trace (Internal)
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) Unified Messaging (UM) system processes can be monitored and logged. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The following data can be traced and logged for each UM port, or all UM ports: •...
Page 119: Utility-Monitor/Trace-E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Signalling Bit Monitor 7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Signalling Bit Monitor Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of a E1 card that is installed in an Expansion Unit by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers. For information about Expansion Units see 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
Page 120: Utility-Monitor/Trace-E1 Line Trace
7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Line Trace 7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Line Trace Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the E1 line card. This utility is intended for use by dealers. For information about Expansion Units, see 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
Page 121: Utility-Report
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report 7.5 Utility—Report 7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks. This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode. The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected.
Page 122: Utility-Report-Ip Extension Statistical Information
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information 7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, V-IPEXT8 cards, V-IPCS4 cards, and the DSP card. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Collection Started Time...
Page 123: Utility-Report-Um View Reports
7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Unified Messaging (UM) system reports can be generated in order to monitor voice mail operations. Reports can be displayed on a PC, printed, or exported. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. To view a report In the View Report tab, select the desired report from the Report Parameters drop-down list.
Page 124 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Call Account Report The call account report displays information about outgoing call activity. Information can be shown by UM port or by mailbox. The report includes date, starting time, used port, connection time, called telephone number, call type, exit status of each callout, total callouts number and the connection time for local or long distance call, and total number of outgoing calls.
Page 125 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports Report Type Description Hourly Statistics Report The hourly statistics report displays information about the number of incoming or outgoing calls, the connected time per hour, etc. This report can be set to be automatically cleared according to scheduled settings. PC Programming Manual...
Page 126: Utility-Report-E-Mail Report
7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report 7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report A log of information about e-mail messages sent using the functions of the PBX can be viewed in the E-mail Report. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. The information in the report includes the following items for each e-mail message sent: •...
Page 127: Utility-Activation Key Installation
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation Activation keys for various features of the PBX can be installed using this screen. Activation key files are copied from a PC to the PBX and activated. Use the below procedure to install activation key files to a PBX. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 128: Utility-Email Notification
7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert 7.7 Utility—Email Notification 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert You can specify e-mail addresses that will receive messages regarding the PBX’s status. System Alarm An e-mail message will be sent to the specified address when there is a system alarm. The e-mail message will contain details about the alarm.
Page 129: Utility-Email Notification-System Analysis
7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis Send a specific log file to the designated e-mail address(es). This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Check the Log File Type drop-down menu, select a log file to send to the e-mail address. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
Page 130: Utility-Email Notification-Test Email
7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email 7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email Send a test e-mail to confirm e-mail sending settings are correctly configured. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
Page 131: Utility-Command
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command 7.8 Utility—Command 7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command System commands can be sent directly to the Unified Messaging system using the Commands dialogue. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue: Enter the desired command, then click RUN.
Page 132: Utility-Um - System Prompts Customisation
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation The System Prompts customisation screen is used to view, play, add, or delete system prompts. The programmer can also check the prompt number and text for these prompts. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 133 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback Select the desired system prompts. Click Play/Record. Click Play or Stop. PC Programming Manual...
Page 134: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting Specify the extensions of supervisors that will control the Automatic Two-way Recording feature for agent extensions. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. Click Add/Delete.
Page 135: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Extension Setting
7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting Specify the Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervisor. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. From the Select a Supervisor drop-down list, select a supervisor (specified in 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting).
Page 136: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Extension Setting List
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List In this list you can view the settings of extensions that are programmed to have calls recorded by the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
Page 137 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Value Range On, Off Feature Guide References 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager ICDG Incoming Only Specifies whether only trunk calls that are received through an incoming call distribution group to the extension are automatically recorded. Note External Call must be set to "On"...
Page 138 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List Feature Guide References 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager PC Programming Manual...
Page 139: Utility-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Maintenance
7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance Automatic Two-way Recording can be enabled or disabled, or set to record until a specified date and time by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account. To start Automatic Two-way Recording, click Start. The button will change to display Stop. Two-way recording for all designated extensions will continue until one of the following occurs: •...
Page 140: Utility-Um - System Maintenance
7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance 7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance Programme settings for Unified Messaging (UM) system maintenance. System Maintenance Mode Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode. System Maintenance Start Time Specifies the System Maintenance start time. After specifying the settings on this screen, click OK.
Page 141: Users
Section 8 Users This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 142: Users-User Profiles
8.1 Users—User Profiles 8.1 Users—User Profiles Manage PBX settings on a per-user level. Information for each user account is displayed and can be added, edited, or and deleted by a User (Administrator) or Installer level account. Note • For User (Administrator) accounts to change User (User) account settings, the Installer account must use the Screen Customise tool to allow User (Administrator) accounts to view the Users—User Profiles screen.
Page 143 8.1 Users—User Profiles Item Description FWD/DND setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from extensions. Mode FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD destination for calls from extensions. Destination For settings and details for FWD/DND items, refer to the following: •...
Page 144: Users-User Profiles-Advanced Setting
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting When User (User) level accounts access their user profiles, they may view and edit items for their account as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings can also be programmed by users.
Page 145 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Call Transfer Status—VIP Filter Specifies whether calls from certain telephone numbers will be transferred directly to a specified extension or telephone number. Note This setting can only be set to "Enable" when Call Transfer Status—Selection is set to "Leave a Message".
Page 146 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number - 1 If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Call Transfer Status—Selection, specifying a telephone number here will transfer the caller to that telephone number. Note If "Call screening"...
Page 147 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator. Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to the top menu and try another extension. Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service. Feature Guide References 3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario Incomplete Call Handling for Busy...
Page 148: Users-Add User
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User 8.2 Users—Add User 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User The Add User—Single User screen provides a method to create user accounts and establish PBX settings on a per-user level. When adding a user, the following settings can be specified. This screen will also be displayed with information already entered when editing an existing user.
Page 149 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Contact Item Description Extension No. Select an extension for the user from the drop-down list. Device Displays the device type of the selected extension. Extension PIN* Specifies the user’s extension PIN. Specifies the user’s Direct Dial In (DDI) number. Fax* Specifies the user’s fax number.
Page 150 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Item Description Prompt Registration* Click Prompt Registration to open the User Prompt Registration screen. The following prompts can be recorded in this screen: • Mailbox owner name • Personal greetings (No Answer, Busy, After Hour, Caller ID Greeting, Temporary Greeting and Absent Message) •...
Page 151 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User Item Description Advanced setting* Click to view the selected mailbox’s settings. See 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings. Note When User (User) level accounts access these settings, additional items are displayed. See 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting. Unified Messaging Click to open a new window in your Web browser and access the download Plug in site for the IMAP Session Controller software.
Page 152: Users-Add User-Multiple Users
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users 8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users The Add User—Multiple Users screen provides a method to create multiple user profiles for a range of extensions at one time. In the From and To fields, specify the range of extensions to create profiles for. Select the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box if you want to create Unified Messaging mailboxes whose mailbox numbers are the same as the assigned extension numbers.
Page 153: Users-Automatic Two-Way Recording
8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording 8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors. See 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for extensions they are supervising.
Page 154: Users-Automatic Two-Way Recording-Record List
8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List 8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Select one or more mailboxes, and click OK. Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages displayed or play a message.
Page 155: Users-Icdg Management
8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor 8.4 Users—ICDG Management This screen is accessible only by users designated as an ACD supervisor. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode. 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Description Users designated as an ACD supervisor can specify an ICD group to monitor, set monitoring conditions, and begin monitoring.
Page 156 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor Value Range ICD groups Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Options—Member Status View Mode Specifies the display mode of the status of group members. Value Range Standard, Simple Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Number of Current Waiting Calls (1-30) Specifies the threshold number of current waiting calls.
Page 157: Users-Icdg Management-Acd Report
8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Blinking Specifies whether highlighted items blink on the monitor screen. Value Range Enable, Disable Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Description On this screen, users designated as an ACD supervisor can create ACD reports on ICD groups after filtering according to group, agent, or call.
Page 158 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Value Range Comma(,), Semicolon(;) Click OK. Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Group Group—View Report To display a report according to groups, follow the procedure below. This feature requires the Call Centre Feature Enhancement activation key. If this activation key is not installed, the View Report button is greyed out.
Page 159 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Item Description Average The average waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS) Max. The longest waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS) Max. Waiting Calls The maximum number of calls waiting in the queue of the target ICD group.
Page 160 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Value Range Yesterday, Last Week, Last Month, Today, This Week, This Month, Custom Period If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also. Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Agent Agent—View Report To display a report according to agents, follow the procedure below.
Page 161 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Value Range Agent, Hour , Day, Date, Month If Hour is selected, set the monitoring range for the target group (0:00–23:59). Feature Guide References 2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD) Agent—Filter Settings—Select Agent To select the target agent for creating a report, follow the procedure below. Click the Select button.
Page 162 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Item Description End Time The end time of the call. (HH:MM:SS) Result The processing result. (Answered/Abandoned/Overflowed) ICDG The incoming ICD Group number. Answering Agent The answering member. (Extension Name/Extension Number) Talk Time The talking time. (HH:MM:SS) Wait Time The waiting time.
Page 163 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report Call—Filter Settings—Call Filter Mode Calls that are the target of an ACD report can be filtered in the following 3 ways. Value Range • Caller ID/CLIP Filter: Filtering according to caller ID or CLIP Click Caller ID/CLIP Filter. Set the target caller ID or CLIP (maximum: 10).
Page 164 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report PC Programming Manual...
Page 165: Pbx Configuration-[1] Configuration
Section 9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 166: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Slot Summary button (see 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property).
Page 167 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot To remove a card from the PBX Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer. Select Delete. Click OK to confirm. The card will be removed. Note The cards in Slot No.1-No.3 of the Basic Unit and the card in Slot No.1 of the Expansion Unit cannot be deleted because these cards are pre-installed.
Page 168 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Card Types Supported by KX-NS300 Max. No/ Max. No/Line Installation Type Card Type Card Programming Card Type Type 9.11 PBX V-IPGW4: Virtual Configuration—[1-1] 4-Channel VoIP Configuration—Slot Gateway Card —V-IPGW—Shelf Property (Trunk) 9.8 PBX V-SIPGW4: Virtual Configuration—[1-1] 4-Channel SIP Trunk Configuration—Slot Card...
Page 169 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Max. No/ Max. No/Line Installation Type Card Type Card Programming Card Type Type 9.23 PBX LCOT6: 6-port Configuration—[1-1] Analogue Trunk Card Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] (Trunk) Configuration—Slot—Card PRI30/E1: PRI30/E1 Property - PRI type Option - Trunk / Trunk Card 9.27 PBX...
Page 170 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Max. No/ Max. No/Line Installation Type Card Type Card Programming Card Type Type 9.23 PBX LCOT6: 6-port Configuration—[1-1] Analogue Trunk Card Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] (Trunk) Configuration—Slot—Card PRI30/E1: PRI30/E1 Property - PRI type Option - Trunk / Trunk Card 9.27 PBX...
Page 171 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Item Description Shelf Indicates the physical or virtual shelf where the card, extension, or device is located in the PBX. • Shelf "1" is the physical shelf of the KX-NS300 PBX. • Shelf "2" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 1. •...
Page 172: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main The properties of the PBX system can be specified. Main DSP CODEC G.711 only (SIP extension) Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for SIP extension calls. Value Range Enable, Disable DSP CODEC G.711 only (IP-GW)
Page 173 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main System Status CPU Usage Displays the system CPU’s current processor load, expressed as a percentage of total capacity (reference only). Value Range 0–100% Memory Usage Displays the amount of system memory currently being used, displayed as a percentage of total capacity (reference only).
Page 174 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range Max. 20 Characters Bandwidth to Gatekeeper Specifies the used bandwidth information notified to the gatekeeper. Value Range 1–255 kbps Primary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the primary gatekeeper. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Primary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper.
Page 175 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main QSIG Connectionless Tunnelling TCP Port Number Specifies the TCP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network. Value Range 1–65535 QSIG Connectionless Tunnelling UDP Port Number Specifies the UDP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network.
Page 176 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range Disable (TDE), Enable (TDA) Protocol Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network. Value Range TCP, UDP Progress Tone Send Mode Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination. When selecting External, call progress tones are audible at the destination.
Page 177 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
Page 178 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—V-IPGW–GW Settings–Option 1— IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones. Value Range Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245) Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833.
Page 179 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main Value Range 0–7 T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 0–3 T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Transferred TCF, Local TCF V-IPGW–DN2IP...
Page 180: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property-Site
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site GW No. Specifies the number of the destination gateway device. This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group Selection on this screen is set to GW No.. Value Range 1–512 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site The properties of the PBX site can be specified.
Page 181 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF PBX Version Indicates the software version of the PBX (reference only). Value Range 0000.00000 - 9999.99999 Data Version Indicates the version number of the data (reference only). Value Range 0000.0000 - 9999.9999 SRAM Version Indicates the version number of the SRAM (reference only).
Page 182 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the site. Value Range 1–32 Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Value Range P2P Group Name Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection IP Terminal Registration Mode...
Page 183 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range 0–64 Send Music On Hold to IP trunk (for P2P conversation) Enables the sending of hold music to an IP trunk during a P2P connection call between an IP extension and IP trunk. Value Range Disable, Enable Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711...
Page 184 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range 0–200 ms Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications. Value Range 1000–65530 ms Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for FAX Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Jitter Buffer Delay Max.
Page 185 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal. Value Range 20–5000 ms CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected. Value Range 20–5000 ms CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter...
Page 186 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter - SIP Extension Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation for SIP extensions. Value Range 1–3 CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern - SIP Extension Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation for SIP extensions.
Page 187 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range -7–8 dB Port Number Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the system to transmit and receive RTP (Real-time Transfer Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port. For voice communications, the system uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here.
Page 188 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection Data Transmission Protocol (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT Specifies the HTTP port of the PBX-side ACS for data communication with KX-UT series SIP phones. Value Range 0–65535 (Setting "0" will close port access for this feature) Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection LOGIN Port Number...
Page 189 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range 1: Disconnect, 0: Connect Media Relay Common—NAT - External IP Address Specifies the NAT device external IP address (common). Value Range Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254 Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection IP Extension—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. Specifies the outside-facing MGCP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections.
Page 190 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site SIP Extension / UT Extension—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No. Specifies the outside-facing port of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server. Value Range 1–65535 Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
Page 191 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Type Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections. Value Range Register, Blank UDP, None Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s) Specifies the time interval between transmissions of Keep Alive packets.
Page 192 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range 30–3600 s Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection Option—NAT - RTP IP Address Specifies the RTP server’s IP address. If using a separate IP address from Common—NAT - External IP Address, configure this setting. Value Range Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254 Feature Guide References...
Page 193 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection Option—NAT - NTP Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address of the network gateway connected to the NTP server. If using a separate IP address from Common—NAT - External IP Address, configure this setting. Value Range Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254 Feature Guide References...
Page 194 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site SIP Session Timer Min. Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting SIP sessions when no communication is detected. Value Range 90–3600 s Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections.
Page 195 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address Specifies the outside-facing IP address or host name of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 100 characters (host name) Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port...
Page 196 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range Register, Blank UDP, None Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s) Specifies the time interval between transmissions of the Keep Alive packet. Note •...
Page 197 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. Specifies the outside-facing HTTP port of the PBX-side network gateway for remote connections that is used when the gateway specified in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT is not available. Value Range 1–65535 Feature Guide References...
Page 198 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site Value Range -14–6 dB DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
Page 199 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-UTEXT side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-UTEXT card. Value Range -14–6 dB DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Multisite GW side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using a gateway between sites.
Page 200: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property-Slot Summary
9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX. Click one of the following tabs to view a summary of the shelf in the PBX: • Physical Shelf: View the physical card shelf. •...
Page 201 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary Version Indicates the software version of the installed card (reference only). Value Range Version number PC Programming Manual References 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot Virtual Shelf The Shelf and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 202: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-System Property-Nsvm
9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Settings related to audio quality and sound detection for the PBX site can be specified. Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Page 203 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM Value Range Disable, Enable AGC reference level for TX signal Specifies the AGC reference level for the Transmit signal. Value Range -50 dBm 0 - 0 dBm 0 AGC reference level for RX signal Specifies the AGC reference level for the Receive signal. Value Range -50 dBm 0 - 0 dBm 0 The maximum allowable AGC gain for TX signal Specifies the maximum allowable AGC gain for the Transmit signal.
Page 204 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM SNS On/Off for Packet-to-PCM path Specifies whether SNS is on or off for the Packet-to-PCM path. Value Range Off, On SNS level for Packet-to-PCM path Specifies the SNS level for the Packet-to-PCM path. Value Range 2 dB - 20 dB SNS level for PCM-to-Packet path Specifies the SNS level for the PCM-to-Packet path. Value Range 2 dB - 20 dB FAX Detection Ability...
Page 205 9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation. Value Range OFF, ON Silence Detection Tx Threshold Specifies the silence detection transmitting threshold. Value Range -38 dBm 0 - -20 dBm 0 Silence Detection Rx Threshold Specifies the silence detection receiving threshold.
Page 206: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Activation Key Status
9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status Refreshes and displays information about activation keys provided by any activation key files in the System Memory and by pre-installed activation keys on the mother board. To access this screen, click the Activation Key button on the Configuration—Slot main screen.
Page 207 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status IP Proprietary Telephone/IP Softphone (ch): IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key IP Proprietary Telephone (ch): IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key SIP Extension (ch): SIP Extension Activation Key QSIG Network: Activation key for QSIG network Two-way Recording Control: Activation key for two-way recording control Message Backup: Activation key for message backup UM Port (ch): Activation key for Unified Messaging ports...
Page 208: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Voip Property
9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property 9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting Allows you to install or remove IP extension cards by entering the number of IP extensions (IP-PT, UT/UDT or SIP extension) and to set IP Terminal Registration Mode. When you place the mouse cursor over the VoIP Property button on the Slot screen, click the VoIP(Ext) Setting button to open the VoIP(Ext) Setting screen.
Page 209 9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting Value Range Number of IP Extensions—Number of cards (Max.4)—V-SIPEXT8 Indicates the number of installed V-SIPEXT8 cards (reference only). Value Range Number of IP Extensions—Number of cards (Max.4) - Total Indicates the number of total installed IP Extension cards (reference only). Value Range IP Terminal Registration Mode Specifies the IP Terminal registration mode for registering IP telephones to the PBX.
Page 210: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Voip Property-Voip (Trunk) Setting
9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Allows you to add new SIP trunk accounts by entering the number of SIP trunk port and some SIP trunk settings. When you place the mouse cursor over the VoIP Property button on the Slot screen, click the VoIP (Trunk) Setting button to open the VoIP (Trunk) Setting screen.
Page 211 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Value Range Max. 100 characters Account Setting—SIP Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the SIP proxy server. This setting is compulsory when not using the DNS server. Note Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Account Setting—SIP Service Domain / Proxy Domain (Max.100 characters)
Page 212 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting Property Setting—Header Type Specifies the header of the SIP message in which the caller information is stored. Value Range From Header, P-Preferred-Identity Header Property Setting—Anonymous format in "From" header Specifies the format of the "From" header when not sending caller ID. Value Range Display name and SIP-URI, Display name only Note If "Display name and SIP-URI"...
Page 213: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Um Card Property
9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system can be specified. Place the mouse cursor over the UM Property button on the Slot screen, and click the Card Property button to open the UM Card Property screen.
Page 214 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property Value Range Disable, Enable CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal. Value Range 20–5000 ms CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected.
Page 215: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Um Port Property
9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system’s ports can be specified. Place the mouse cursor over the UM Property button on the Slot screen, and click the Port Property button to open the UM Port Property screen.
Page 216: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-Port Type View
9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View Displays the number of connected telephones, devices, and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can be accessed from the Port Property screen of any extension cards in use in the PBX system, including extension cards of Expansion Units.
Page 217: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Shelf Property
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Common settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.
Page 218 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out. Value Range Blank UDP, None NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Specifies the interval time until the next Keep Alive packet is sent. Note This interval must be shorter than the NAT binding time of the router.
Page 219 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property Value Range 0–1600 ms SIP Called Party Number Check Ability Specifies whether to receive a SIP trunk call when receiving the INVITE message with an incorrect target SIP-URI. The setting specified here is also applied when the request header is blank or contains characters that cannot be modified to a receivable number.
Page 220 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property SIP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability. Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay SIP Called Party Number Search Mode Specifies the search mode for the notified SIP Called Party Number information. Value Range Mode 1: Searches SIP accounts only.
Page 221: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Card Property
9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property Common card settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. DNS SRV Record Resolve Ability Specifies whether to request that the DNS server translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS SRV record.
Page 222: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipgw-Port Property
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Programming Port Properties Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each virtual SIP gateway port. Icon Description In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type. Icon Description for Parameter Type Programmed automatically by selecting the desired SIP provider in Select Provider.
Page 223 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be set are OUS. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
Page 224 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.3.1 Trunk Adaptor Connection Trunk Property Specifies the networking type of each SIP trunk. Note Connection Attribute is set to "Trunk Adaptor" for the port, only "Public" will be available for this setting. Value Range Public, VPN Channel Attribute...
Page 225 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Note Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 SIP Server Port Number Specifies the port number of the SIP proxy server. Value Range 1–65535 SIP Service Domain Specifies the domain name provided by the SIP provider.
Page 226 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Account The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 227 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Register Ability Specifies whether to send the REGISTER message to the SIP server. Value Range Disable, Enable Register Sending Interval...
Page 228 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range 0-65535 s The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 229 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Session Timer Ability Enables the PBX to periodically refresh SIP sessions by sending repeated requests. Value Range Disable: This feature is not activated.
Page 230 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Proxy-Require Option Specifies option tags in a Proxy-Require header field so that the SIP server is notified that the client is behind a router with NAT enabled and firewall. Value Range Max. 100 characters Failover Timer(INVITE) Specifies the amount of time to wait for a response for an INVITE request.
Page 231 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part Specifies the value to be stored in the username part of the SIP-URI of the P-Preferred-Identity header. Value Range User Name, Authentication ID, PBX-CLIP P-Preferred-Identity Header—SIP-URI Specifies the complete SIP-URI address of the P-Preferred-Identity header. The configuration in P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part will be invalid if this parameter is set.
Page 232 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property [Example] From: Anonymous <sip:1234@example.com> P-Asserted-Identity header Select whether to include a P-Asserted-Identity header with caller information. This header will be sent independent of the selection for Header Type (From Header/P-Preferred-Identity Header). Value Range Disable, Enable Note •...
Page 233 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property MEX - Prefix for Outgoing Specifies the Mobile Device Access outgoing prefix for calls made to MEX-enabled mobile devices. Value Range Max. 16 characters MEX - Additional Dial Specifies additional digits to be inserted before the dialled number of an incoming call from a MEX-enabled mobile device.
Page 234 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Voice Activity Detection for G.711...
Page 235 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Disable, Enable DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones. Value Range Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (SIP INFO) Payload Type Specifies the payload type of RFC2833 for DTMF tones. Note Manual programming is required if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Value Range 96–127 RTP/RTCP...
Page 236 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property RTP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay RTP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ. Value Range 0–63 RTP QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number.
Page 237 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 238 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property Value Range Disable, Blank UDP T.38 Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 239 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property T38 FAX QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is compulsory when HEX is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available. Value Range 00–FF The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 240 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Supplementary Service The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 241 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property CNIP (Receive) Specifies whether to receive the caller’s name to be displayed on the called party’s telephone when receiving a SIP trunk call. Value Range Yes, No Blind Transfer(REFER) Specifies whether to allow blind transfers using REFER. Value Range Yes, No Attended Transfer(REFER)
Page 242: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw-Shelf Property
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Main Gatekeeper Available Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. Value Range Disable, Enable RTCP Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to enable the PBX to send RTCP packets.
Page 243 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property RTP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ. Value Range 0–63 RTP QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number. Value Range 00–FF T38 FAX QoS Available Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 244 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Feature Guide References...
Page 245 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) QSIG-CT Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network. Value Range No, Yes Feature Guide References 4.2.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG QSIG-CF Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
Page 246 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Dial End Code Specifies the delimiter code to be used to signal the end of a dialled number. Value Range 0–9, #, * Incoming Call Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
Page 247 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Packet Sampling Time for G.729A Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms FAX Detection Ability...
Page 248 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Value Range 96–127 T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range 272–512 T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Disable, Enable T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages...
Page 249 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 250 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 251: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw-Shelf Property-Gk Settings
9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property—GK Settings 9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property—GK Settings Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed. Destination Number Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper. Value Range Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9) Device Name Specifies the name of the device for programming reference. Value Range Max.
Page 252: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw-Shelf Property-Hunt Pattern
9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property—Hunt Pattern 9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Shelf Property—Hunt Pattern The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX. A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed. Hunt Pattern 1–16 Leading Number Specifies the leading digits of dialled numbers by which to determine the call distribution port group to direct...
Page 253: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipgw-Port Property
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Port Property 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Trunk Adaptor To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
Page 254 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Port Property Feature Guide References 4.2.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 255: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipext-Card Property
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 256 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 257 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Card Property Resending Time Out (MGCP) Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 75–120 s Feature Guide References...
Page 258 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Card Property Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Note For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this setting, the setting for EC Gain in 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property—Main is applied. Value Range -14–6 dB Feature Guide References...
Page 259: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipext-Port Property
9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 260 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialogue box will appear. Click OK. A dialogue box will appear. Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close.
Page 261 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Status Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only). Value Range None, Registered Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address) Specifies the MAC address of the IP-PT. This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS.
Page 262 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main— P2P Group Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only). Value Range P2P Group Name PC Programming Manual References 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main—...
Page 263 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
Page 264 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property IP Codec Priority Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data. Some codecs may become unavailable depending on the value set here, as follows: – When G.722 is selected, the priority is G.722 ® G.711 ® G.729A. When G.711 is selected, the priority is G.711 ®...
Page 265 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Voice The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Value Range Max.
Page 266 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Value Range 96–127 Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Remote Place The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 267 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property Phone Location Specifies the type of extension connected to the port. Value Range Local: The extension is located on the same network as the PBX (standard configuration). Remote (MRG): The extension is accessing the PBX remotely (use Media Relay Gateway). Feature Guide References 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) PC Programming Manual...
Page 268: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipext-Card Property
9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Card Property 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Card Property The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms Feature Guide References...
Page 269 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension PC Programming Manual...
Page 270: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Sipext-Port Property
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Main Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 271 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group. Value Range 1–32 PC Programming Manual References 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main—...
Page 272 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 2.20.1 Message Waiting 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
Page 273 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Value Range Automatic, Speech, Audio Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Feature Guide References...
Page 274 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property the Copy to button. This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS, and the programmer must be in On-line mode. Value Range 4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z) Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Connection...
Page 275 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy the value for Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy to button.
Page 276 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal. Value Range No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.
Page 277 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Transferred TCF, Local TCF Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension PC Programming Manual...
Page 278: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipcs-Card Property
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
Page 279 Disable, 10–120 s First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Page 280 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Card Property Value Range -14–6 dB DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
Page 281: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Ipcs-Port Property
9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port. IP-CS Registration and De-registration An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
Page 282 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close. Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None". Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 283 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property Value Range Version number Air Sync Group No Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the IP-CS. Value Range None, 1–16 PC Programming Manual References 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 284 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS—Port Property Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec.
Page 285: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Utext-Card Property
9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property Various settings can be programmed for V-UTEXT8 cards. Click Common Settings to change these settings. Main Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 24 ms, 128 ms DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Page 286 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Card Property PERIODIC Inform Interval Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Inform is set to "Enable". Value Range 30–3600 s INFORM retransmission counter Specifies the number of times the PERIODIC Inform is sent for extensions when attempting to establish a connection.
Page 287: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-V-Utext-Port Property
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for the ports of V-UTEXT8 cards. KX-UT Series SIP Phone Registration and De-registration A KX-UT series SIP phone must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and SIP phone before it can be used.
Page 288 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Click Forced De-registration. A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialogue box will appear.
Page 289 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for the port. This option is only available in On-line mode.
Page 290 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP phone (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Program Ver. Indicates the programme software file version of the SIP phone (reference only). Value Range Version number Feature Guide References...
Page 291 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Option The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Value Range Max.
Page 292 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Value Range 0–63 UT Codec Priority - 1st—UT Codec Priority - 4th Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. None is only available for 2nd, 3rd, and 4th priorities. Value Range G.722, G711A, G.729A, G711Mu, None Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
Page 293 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. Value Range Max.
Page 294 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT—Port Property Feature Guide References 5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection PC Programming Manual...
Page 295: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Extension-Card Property
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property The property for the extension cards can be specified. SLT Pulse Dial Mode Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand SLT Off Hook Time Specifies the minimum length that a pulse dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as an off-hook signal.
Page 296 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property Feature Guide References 2.13.3 Call Splitting Flash Timing - Min. Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal. Value Range 8 ´...
Page 297 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Card Property Ringing Start Mode of Extension Caller ID Specifies the Ringing Start Mode of Extension Caller ID. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. Value Range Mode 1: With Pre-ring signal Mode 2: Without Pre-ring signal PC Programming Manual...
Page 298: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Extension-Port Property
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To view the total number of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 299 DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.) VM(DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 8 PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
Page 300 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property Feature Guide References 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) DPT Type—Location No. Specifies the location number of the connected DSS Console or PC Console. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to DSS or PC Console. Note that, depending on system traffic, there may be a limit to the number of PC Consoles that can be supported by a single DLC/DHLC card.
Page 301 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property Value Range None, 1 PC Programming Manual References 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Headset OFF/ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with a DPT. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-Hybrid(S-DPT).
Page 302: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property - Lco Type
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified. Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 3–6 s First Dial Timer (CO)
Page 303 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range 64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms Pulse / DTMF Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Page 304 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range Other, 60%, 67% PC Programming Manual References 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Page 305 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company. Value Range FSK, FSK (with Visual Caller ID), DTMF Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Max Receive Time Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network.
Page 306 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References...
Page 307 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Feature Guide References...
Page 308: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Lco Port
9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 309 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line.
Page 310 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port PC Programming Manual References 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Feature Guide References 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Page 311: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property - Pri Type
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type The properties of the PRI card can be specified. ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 312 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 313 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 314 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms ISDN Extension—T203 Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms ISDN Extension—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. Value Range 0–18000 ´...
Page 315 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T306 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
Page 316 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - PRI type ISDN Extension—T320 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms ISDN Extension—T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
Page 317: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property - Pri Port
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port. Main The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 318 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Status Receive Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call. Value Range Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network. Disconnect: Disconnect the call.
Page 319 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Page 320 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master. Value Range Off, On PC Programming Manual References...
Page 321 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN. Ring AN Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN. Feature Guide References 5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension Network Configuration...
Page 322 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Network Numbering Plan The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Type Selects the port type.
Page 323 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks. Value Range Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber Called Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Page 324 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
Page 325 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range 0–15 Feature Guide References 4.1.2.9 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 326: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-E1 Type
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type The properties of the E1 card can be specified. To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2. Line Coding Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card. Value Range HDB3, AMI Frame Sequence...
Page 327 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type LIU Send Option Indicates the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU (reference only). Value Range Mode 1-Mode 8 LIU Receive Option Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalisation) of LIU. Value Range Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB RAI Signal Detection Mode Selects the RAI signal detection mode.
Page 328: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-E1 Type Line Signal Setting
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting DR2 Setting Type Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal. Value Range Normal, Option 1, Option 3 Inter-digit Timer Specifies the pseudo-answer time. This setting is available only when Option 1 or Option 3 is selected in DR2 Setting Type on this screen..
Page 329 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting Value Range No Detection: Meter pulses are not sent or received. Outgoing call only: Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls. Both calls: Sends and receives call charge meter pulses. Feature Guide References 2.29.1 E1 Line Service Meter Pulse Detection—Bit Position Specifies the bit position of a call charge meter pulse.
Page 330 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting Value Range -31 dB–0 dB DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Receive Specifies the strength range within which an MFC-R2 signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as an MFC-R2 signal. Value Range -38 - 0 dB – -23 - 0 dB Frame Error Detection—Error Detection Specifies whether the PBX detects frame synchronisation errors.
Page 331: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Card Property-E1 Type Mfc-R2 Setting 1
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 ANI Service—Mode Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode. Value Range None: ANI service is not activated. Incoming call only: Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line. Outgoing call only: Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line. Both calls: Sends and receives the caller’s number through the E1 line.
Page 332 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Complete (1)(4) Specifies the code used to indicate the end of an ANI number. Value Range ANI Complete (1): 1–15 ANI Complete (2)–(4): Undefined, 1–15 Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Reject Specifies the code used to reject an ANI number. Value Range 1–15 Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit...
Page 333 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1 Value Range 1–15 MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[*] code Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [*]. Value Range 11–15 MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[#] code Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [#]. Value Range 11–15 PC Programming Manual...
Page 334 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-A Code Assignment—Address Complete Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company. Value Range 1–15 Group-A Code Assignment—ANI Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send an ANI number. Value Range 1–15 Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1)
Page 335 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-A Code Assignment—(N-1) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-1)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-A Code Assignment—(N-2) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-2)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-A Code Assignment—(N-3) Request...
Page 336 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2 Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-B Code Assignment—Unallocated Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the received number is not defined. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-B Code Assignment—Congestion Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Group-B Code Assignment—Out-of-Service...
Page 337: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Port Property-E1 Port
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Indicates the channel number (reference only).
Page 338 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Channel Type Selects the channel type. Value Range Undefined: Not assigned DR2: Digital System R2 Feature Guide References 2.29.1 E1 Line Service Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the E&M channel. Value Range Public: Use the DIL/DDI/DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls. Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.
Page 339 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Receive Digits Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received from a DDI/DID number when receiving a call with the DDI/DID number. Value Range 0–15 CPC Detection Time—Out, In Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line.
Page 340 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Feature Guide References 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Page 341: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3
9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3 Settings for Expansion Units connected to the KX-NS300 over a stacking connection can be programmed. Click Expansion Unit1, Expansion Unit2 or Expansion Unit3 on the Slot screen to view the physical card shelf of the Expansion Unit.
Page 342 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3 • 3: Expansion Unit2 • 4: Expansion Unit3 Slot: The physical slot number within the Expansion Unit where the card is installed. Programming Port Properties for cards installed in Expansion Units To change the status of a port when programming via Web Maintenance Console, click the desired cell in the Connection column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.
Page 343: Pbx Configuration-[1-1] Configuration-Slot-Doorphone Card-Card Property
9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property The doorphone card’s settings can be programmed. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot. Port Status Specifies the port’s status.
Page 344: Pbx Configuration-[1-2] Configuration-Portable Station
9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. PS Registration and De-registration A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below;...
Page 345 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station Personal Identification Number Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong PBX. Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX. Value Range 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Index...
Page 346: Pbx Configuration-[1-3] Configuration-Option
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option System options can be programmed. System Wireless—System ID Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only). To clear the System ID Click the Clear Master CS button. A warning will be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning, and then click Yes. Note The System ID can be cleared using this procedure only in Off-line mode.
Page 347: Pbx Configuration-[1-4] Configuration-Clock Priority
9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority Shelf-Slot Number Selects and prioritises slot numbers for PRI cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX. Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides. To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below: Assign a Clock Priority to each slot.
Page 348: Pbx Configuration-[1-5] Configuration-Dsp Resource
9.37.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource IP communications that are handled by the PBX require DSP resources. DSP resources can be reserved for various functions of the PBX. The DSP resource advisor is a tool that analyses the configuration and user requirements for the system in order to recommend which DSP card should be used.
Page 349 9.37.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—Unified message Specifies the number of UM ports to reserve DSP resources for. Value Range 0–25 ports (UM: 24 ports, Fax: 1 port) Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Services—Two-way Recording Specifies the number of UM ports reserved in Services—Unified message to use for Two-way Recording.
Page 350 9.37.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting Value Range 0–506 DSP resources Feature Guide References 5.5.4 DSP Resource Usage Select a time to apply the set values Specifies when the settings made on this screen are applied. Note Any calls being made that use DSP resources will be disconnected when setting values are changed and applied.
Page 351: Pbx Configuration-[1-5-1] Configuration-Dsp Resource-Setting-Dsp Resource Advisor
9.37.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting 9.37.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor The DSP Resource Advisor assists programmers in the allocation of DSP resources to various PBX functions. Note the value of Total Power. This is the total capacity for allocating DSP resources, depending on the DSP card installed in the PBX.
Page 352: Pbx Configuration-[1-5-2] Configuration-Dsp Resource-Usage
9.37.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage 9.37.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage The Usage screen is a graphical display of DSP resource usage. This information is useful to analyse usage patterns over time to determine DSP resource needs and optimal configuration settings. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 353: Pbx Configuration-[2] System
Section 10 PBX Configuration—[2] System This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 354: Pbx Configuration-[2-1] System-Date & Time
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting 10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time 10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS).
Page 355: Pbx Configuration-[2-1-2] System-Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
Page 356 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Note If KX-UT series SIP phones are connected to the PBX, and this setting is changed, they must be restarted for the new time zone setting to take effect. Value Range -14:00–+14:00 Feature Guide References 5.5.5 Automatic Setup...
Page 357 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
Page 358 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving End Date—Year, Month, Day Specifies the end date of daylight savings time. Value Range Year: 2000–2035 Month: 1–12 Day: 1–31 PC Programming Manual References 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 5.5.5 Automatic Setup PC Programming Manual...
Page 359: Pbx Configuration-[2-2] System-Operator & Bgm
10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified. PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 360: Pbx Configuration-[2-3] System-Timers & Counters
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Various system timers and counters can be programmed. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled. Value Range 0–10 Feature Guide References...
Page 361 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start (s) Specifies the length of time between going off-hook and the start of automatic dialling when the Hot Line feature is set. Value Range 0–15 s Feature Guide References...
Page 362 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit (s) Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.
Page 363 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Recall—Transfer Recall (s) Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension. Value Range 1–240 s PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings...
Page 364 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 1–15 s Feature Guide References 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) 2.10 Busy Line/Busy Party Features Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset (s) Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset. The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires.
Page 365 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering (s) Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line. Value Range 0.0–12.0 s PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer (s)
Page 366 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 0–60 s PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 2.1.1.5 Intercept Routing...
Page 367 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time (x60s) Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the trunk-to-trunk call.) Value Range 60 ´...
Page 368 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–15) s PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call Doorphone—Call Duration (x10s) Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected. Value Range 10 ´...
Page 369 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Timed Reminder—Interval Time (x10s) Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms. Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–120) s Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration (x10s) Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings. Value Range 10 ´...
Page 370 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 0–240 s Feature Guide References 2.14.2 Conference Miscellaneous Caller ID—Waiting to receive (s) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analogue trunk. If the Caller ID is received through an analogue trunk card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which Caller ID Detection is disabled, this timer is not applicable.
Page 371 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.7.5 Walking COS 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry 2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) External Sensor—Ring Duration (s) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before cancelling a sensor call. Value Range 10 ´...
Page 372 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode (s) Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status. Value Range 1–15 s Air Synchronisation—Watching Degeneracy (x60s) Specifies the length of time that a Slave CS can maintain an ongoing call after air synchronisation is lost.
Page 373 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Feature Guide References 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer (s) When the destination of an incoming call is a PS, specifies the length of time the PBX searches for the PS before setting its status to Out of Range.
Page 374 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (s) Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring. The conference group call will be established with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires, the call is cancelled.
Page 375: Pbx Configuration-[2-4] System-Week Table
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.
Page 376 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 5.1.3 Tenant Service 5.1.4 Time Service 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting is set to Enable.
Page 377: Pbx Configuration-[2-5] System-Holiday Table
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed. You can click the UM Holiday Table tab to open the Holiday Table used for features of the Unified Messaging system.
Page 378 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Month Specifies the month of the holiday end date. Value Range 1–12 PC Programming Manual References 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table— End Date (Month Day) Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Day Specifies the day of the holiday end date.
Page 379: Pbx Configuration-[2-6] System-Numbering Plan
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs in a network can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Guide.
Page 380 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main No. of Additional Digits Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number. Value Range None: 0 digit X: 1 digit XX: 2 digits Features Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a dial tone.
Page 381 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings TIE Line Access Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Feature Guide References...
Page 382 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System DOORPHONE Call Specifies the feature number used to make a call to a doorphone. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call...
Page 383 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main OGM Record / Clear / Playback Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a certain OGM. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—...
Page 384 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension. Value Range Max.
Page 385 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Feature Guide References 2.17.1 Paging Automatic Callback Busy Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code...
Page 386 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension. Value Range Max.
Page 387 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.13.1 Call Hold Door Open Specifies the feature number used to open a door. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Feature Guide References 2.18.2 Door Open External Relay Access...
Page 388 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension ISDN Hold Specifies the feature number used to hold a call using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature. Value Range Max.
Page 389 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the trunk in use (subscriber’s number) or the extension to the network. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—...
Page 390 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.20.1 Message Waiting FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk and intercom calls. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND...
Page 391 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main FWD No Answer Timer Set Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References...
Page 392 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from picking up calls to your extension).
Page 393 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Data Line Security Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security (i.e., preventing signals from other extensions during data transmission). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.11.5 Data Line Security Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call...
Page 394 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.10.2 Executive Busy Override Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 395 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set/cancel the Hot Line feature, or programme the number to be automatically dialled. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &...
Page 396 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Printing Message Specifies the feature number used to select a Printing Message to be output on SMDR.
Page 397 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Time Service Switch 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Remote Extension Dial Lock Off Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
Page 398 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Extension PIN Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) Dial Information (CTI) Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX.
Page 399 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 4.2.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Busy Out Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—...
Page 400 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 4.2.1 TIE Line Service KX-T7710 The settings of the MESSAGE key and One-touch keys on the KX-T7710 can be programmed. Note • This tab is for programming extensions connected to Expansion Units. For information about setting up Expansion Units, see 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/ Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
Page 401: Pbx Configuration-[2-6-2] System-Numbering Plan-Quick Dial
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks"...
Page 402: Pbx Configuration-[2-6-3] System-Numbering Plan-B/Na Dnd Call Feature
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/ NA DND Call Feature Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number. For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering"...
Page 403 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice. Value Range 1 digit (0–9, *, or #) Feature Guide References 2.5.3 Intercom Call Message Waiting Set...
Page 404 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2 Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an extension in DND mode. This is the same setting as BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override on this screen, and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features.
Page 405: Pbx Configuration-[2-7] System-Class Of Service
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.
Page 406 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings TRS Level on Extension Lock Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature. Value Range 1: Allows all trunk calls 2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7: Restricts all trunk calls PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 407 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit Enables the extension-to-trunk call duration feature. The maximum call duration can be set using Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s) on 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings.
Page 408 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Account Code Mode Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a trunk call. Value Range Option, Forced PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 409 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Call Pickup by DSS Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 410 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy. Value Range Disable: The call is not transferred. (If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification feature, it is possible to inform the destination about the call transfer.) Enable: The transferred call is queued for the time period specified in Recall—Transfer Recall (s) in...
Page 411 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.10.3 Call Monitor Executive Busy Override Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...
Page 412 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Group Forward Set Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group. Enable-All: An extension can set call forwarding for all groups. Enable-Group: An extension can only set call forwarding for the group to which the extension belongs.
Page 413 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Time Service Switch Enables manual switching of time modes. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service PDN/SDN...
Page 414 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN— COS Name Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension SDN Key Assignment by PT Program Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.
Page 415 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings External Relay Access Enables access to external relays. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Feature Guide References 2.18.4 External Relay Control Accept the Call from DISA Enables reception of calls from DISA.
Page 416 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Allow, Deny PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) CA Chat Enables the chat feature when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client.
Page 417 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Conference Group Call Operation Enables making conference group calls. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (s) 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—...
Page 418: Pbx Configuration-[2-7-2] System-Class Of Service-External Call Block
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/ lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list. Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64 Specifies the available trunk groups.
Page 419: Pbx Configuration-[2-7-3] System-Class Of Service-Internal Call Block
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
Page 420: Pbx Configuration-[2-8] System-Ring Tone Patterns
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on.
Page 421: Pbx Configuration-[2-8-2] System-Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Doorphone
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 422: Pbx Configuration-[2-8-3] System-Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Others
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Page 423 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for LCS warning tones. Value Range Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2 PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—...
Page 424: Pbx Configuration-[2-9] System-System Options
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Various system settings can be programmed. Option 1 PT LCD—Date Display Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions. Value Range Date-Month, Month-Date PT LCD—Time Display Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions.
Page 425 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY 2.21.3 LED Indication PT Fwd / DND—DND LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the DND feature is activated. Value Range On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND...
Page 426 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Feature Guide References 2.17.1 Paging PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with D-PTs and IP-PTs. Value Range Disable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through the hands-free speaker.
Page 427 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot prevent incoming calls from ringing. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands-free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is established automatically when it receives a call from a trunk.
Page 428 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 2 Extension Clear—Call Waiting Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed. Value Range Clear, Do not clear Feature Guide References 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear—Fwd/DND Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed. Value Range Clear, Do not clear Feature Guide References...
Page 429 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options CODEC—Priority Notification from SIP Network (for Incoming Call) Specifies whether the priority notification from the SIP network is used in place of the PBX’s codec priority for SIP trunks. Value Range Enable, Disable ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode Specifies whether to automatically send "#"...
Page 430 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration (x10s) Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory Specifies whether any digits dialled after the called party answers (for example, to access a specific extension within another company) are also saved as part of the redial number.
Page 431 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options CO - CO Call Limitation—After Conference Selects whether to allow a call between 2 outside destinations to continue after the originator of the conference has left the conference. Value Range Enable: The call will be disconnected. Disable: The call will continue.
Page 432 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options "CO to TIE" calls. Legacy Trunk IP Trunk Private Line CO-to-TIE: Restricted Conference calls that include legacy trunks and IP trunks. Legacy Trunk IP Trunk Restricted Conf. Extension You can check the programming status and call restriction status of Logical Partitioning in 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log.
Page 433 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.
Page 434 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.14.2 Conference 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension when a party leaves a conference call. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References...
Page 435 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialling. Value Range Type A, Type B PC Programming Manual References 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port...
Page 436 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Option 4 DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group. Value Range On or Flash, Off Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Call Pickup 2.21.3 LED Indication...
Page 437 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.12.1 Call Transfer DSS Key—Caller Information Display before Call Pick-up Specifies whether incoming caller information is displayed after pressing the DSS button when a call is ringing at the designated extension, instead of answering the call. Value Range Enable: Pressing the DSS button displays the caller’s information.
Page 438 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party) Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to "Enable", the transfer destination will receive the original caller’s CLIP information, not the information of the extension that performed the transfer.
Page 439 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.
Page 440 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range 1–12 Feature Guide References 2.20.1 Message Waiting Whisper OHCA—for SLT Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP-PTs Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call Selects whether Busy Station Signalling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy extension.
Page 441 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PT Feature Access—No. 1–8 Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension. Value Range None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, DOORPHONE Call, Door Open, Relay On, External BGM, Paging ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network.
Page 442 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options 3rd Party CTI—System status retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call Control CTI. Value Range 0–60 s Feature Guide References 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI.
Page 443 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Value Range Enable, Disable CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key Selects whether to force an extension to become idle while having a call held on a PDN/SDN button. Value Range Enable, Disable Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Option 7 Incoming Call Log—Busy/Intercept (when Called Party is Busy)
Page 444 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Incoming Call Log—Extension / TIE Call Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are recorded in the answering extension’s incoming call log. Value Range Enable, Disable Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log—Extension Call Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are recorded in the calling extension’s outgoing call log.
Page 445 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options Extension - Trunk P2P—IP Extension - SIP Trunk P2P Specifies whether P2P connections are enabled between SIP trunks and IP extensions. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Conference Group—Maximum Number of Speakers During a Conference Group Call Specifies the maximum number of participants that can speak during a Conference Group Call.
Page 446 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options PC Programming Manual References 8.1 Users—User Profiles 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Class of Service (Mailbox) Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview PC Programming Manual...
Page 447: Pbx Configuration-[2-10] System-Extension Cid Settings
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed. Extension Caller ID Modulation Type Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore) Feature Guide References...
Page 448 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Caller ID Signal Type Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT (reference only). Value Range Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number when sending the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT.
Page 449 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID FSK Transmission Level (for MCSLC Card) Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation for MCSLC cards. Value Range -14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual...
Page 450: Pbx Configuration-[2-11] System-Audio Gain
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH 10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed. Paging—EPG 1-6 (External Pager 1-6) Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1. Value Range -15.5–15.5 dB PC Programming Manual References...
Page 451 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Feature Guide References 2.13.4 Music on Hold 2.30.1 Background Music (BGM) External MOH—MOH 3–8 (Music on Hold 3–8) Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1-6 (MOH 3-8). Value Range -31.5–31.5 dB PC Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator &...
Page 452: Pbx Configuration-[2-11-2] System-Audio Gain-Card
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card. Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX. Value Range -31.5–31.5 dB Down Gain (From PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card.
Page 453: Pbx Configuration-[3] Group
Section 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 454: Pbx Configuration-[3-1] Group-Trunk Group
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings 11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of a trunk group are applied to all trunks in the group. A maximum of 64 trunk groups can be programmed. For more information on trunk groups, see "5.1.2 Group"...
Page 455 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access CO-CO Duration Time (*60s) Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected. Value Range None, 1–60 (´...
Page 456 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Dialling Plan Table Specifies the table to be used for en-bloc dialling. Value Range 1–4 PC Programming Manual References 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan Tone Detection Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Page 457 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References...
Page 458 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Page 459 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Mode Enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls. This setting is only for users in Brazil. Value Range Disable, Enable Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Wait Time...
Page 460: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-2] Group-Trunk Group-Local Access Priority
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access, the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here. Trunk Group No.
Page 461: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-3] Group-Trunk Group-Caller Id Modification
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to pre-programmed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back. Leading Digits After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group.
Page 462 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification PC Programming Manual References 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings— Caller ID Modification Table 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Length of Digits The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller’s number depending on the length of digits, as programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group.
Page 463 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Added Number (for National) Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) but does not exceed Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Page 464 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification PC Programming Manual References 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual...
Page 465: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-4] Group-Trunk Group-Dialling Plan
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
Page 466 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY PC Programming Manual...
Page 467: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-4] Group-Trunk Group-Dialling Plan-Auto Assign
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically. Select Auto Assigning Table Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan table.
Page 468: Pbx Configuration-[3-1-5] Group-Trunk Group-Charge Rate
11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group. Trunk Group Name Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 469: Pbx Configuration-[3-2] Group-User Group
11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and several paging groups.
Page 470: Pbx Configuration-[3-3] Group-Call Pickup Group
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 call pickup groups can be programmed. To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
Page 471: Pbx Configuration-[3-3] Group-Call Pickup Group-All Setting
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups. Call Pickup Group Name Specifies the name of the call pickup group.
Page 472: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Page 473: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group-All Setting
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Specifies the name of the paging group.
Page 474: Pbx Configuration-[3-4] Group-Paging Group-External
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 475: Pbx Configuration-[3-5] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed.
Page 476 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution FWD Mode Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group. Value Range No Ring, Ring PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND...
Page 477 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 5.1.3 Tenant Service Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed to a trunk, the TRS/Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.
Page 478 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue.
Page 479 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature 2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature Time out & Manual Queue Redirection Overflow Time Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination. Value Range None, 10 ´...
Page 480 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range None, Table 1–Table 64 PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued.
Page 481 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out from the incoming call distribution group. Value Range None, 1–15 Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Maximum No.
Page 482 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Feature Guide References 2.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature Programmed Mailbox No. (16 Digits) Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration.
Page 483 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Group FWD Call from CO—Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Group FWD Call from Extension—Setting...
Page 484: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-1] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings-Member List
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups.
Page 485 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Wrap-up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before the member extension can accept another call. This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on"...
Page 486: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-2] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Queuing Time Table
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled. A maximum of 64 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed. Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16 Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.
Page 487: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-3] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Miscellaneous
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed. Options—Call Log to ICD Group when ICD Member Answered Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
Page 488 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Options—Longest Idle Distribution Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension that has been idle the longest (ACD). Value Range Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD) Feature Guide References 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Options—Wrap-up Timer based on...
Page 489 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Value Range Enable (Logging), Disable Feature Guide References 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY Options—ICD Group Call Monitor View—Screen Update Time (s) Specifies the screen update interval time for the ICD Group Call Monitor View. Value Range 5–60 Feature Guide References...
Page 490 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Value Range Guidance No.1–8 Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature PC Programming Manual...
Page 491: Pbx Configuration-[3-5-4] Group-Incoming Call Distribution Group-Acd Supervisor
11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor This screen is only available at Installer level. Description After specifying an ICD Group to be monitored, specify a User (User) or User (Administrator) as an ACD supervisor to begin monitoring.
Page 492: Pbx Configuration-[3-6] Group-Extension Hunting Group
11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a pre-programmed hunting type. If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Page 493: Pbx Configuration-[3-6] Group-Extension Hunting Group-Member List
11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension No.
Page 494: Pbx Configuration-[3-7] Group-Um Group
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings 11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings The Unified Messaging (UM) ports of a PBX make up a group, called a UM group. This group has a floating extension number, which can be the destination for incoming calls, redirected calls, transferred calls, etc. When a call is received at the UM group, the Unified Messaging system can direct the caller to leave a voice message or dial a number to reach the desired party.
Page 495 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the UM when a call is redirected from an incoming call distribution group to the UM group by Intercept Routing. When the Unified Messaging system receives the mailbox number, it answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.
Page 496: Pbx Configuration-[3-7-2] Group-Um Group-Unit Settings
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings A UM group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 497: Pbx Configuration-[3-7-2] Group-Um Group-Unit Settings-Member List
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings 11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information about all UM ports that belong to the selected UM group. Indicates the UM port number (reference only). Value Range 1–24 PC Programming Manual References 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings Extension No.
Page 498: Pbx Configuration-[3-8] Group-Ps Ring Group
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 128 PS extensions.
Page 499: Pbx Configuration-[3-8] Group-Ps Ring Group-Member List
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List Each PS Ring Group can have up to 128 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the PS Ring Group Number list. To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Page 500: Pbx Configuration-[3-9] Group-Conference Group
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a conference group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups.
Page 501 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group Automatic Answer w/o Extension Setting Specifies if the extensions of the conference will automatically answer a conference group call, even if Hands-free Answerback is not set for those extensions. This setting can be used with PTs. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References...
Page 502: Pbx Configuration-[3-9] Group-Conference Group-Member List
11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the Conference Group No. list. When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
Page 503: Pbx Configuration-[3-10] Group-P2P Group
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group Settings for peer-to-peer (P2P) groups can be programmed. P2P Group Name Specifies the name of the P2P group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Feature Guide References 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection Bandwidth Control Specifies whether to use the bandwidth precedence setting of the P2P group for calling among different P2P groups.
Page 504: Pbx Configuration-[3-11] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group
Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group. 2 VM (DPT) Groups can be programmed.
Page 505 11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VM when a call is redirected from an incoming call distribution group to the VM group by Intercept Routing. When the VPS receives the mailbox number, it answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.
Page 506: Pbx Configuration-[3-11-2] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Page 507 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings PC Programming Manual References 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main— TIE Line Access 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension Feature Guide References 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 4.2.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Group Name Specifies the name of the centralised VM (DPT) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM (DPT) group.
Page 508: Pbx Configuration-[3-11-2] Group-Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings-Member List
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type—Type of 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property will be displayed. In addition, the other information displayed here can also be set in 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property.
Page 509 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings PC Programming Manual References 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group VM Port No. Indicates the VM port number for the port (reference only). Value Range 1-12 PC Programming Manual References 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 510 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration PC Programming Manual...
Page 511: Pbx Configuration-[3-12] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group
Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. 2 VM (DTMF) Groups can be programmed.
Page 512 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message Waiting) has been successfully set or cancelled on an extension. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause]) VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up.
Page 513 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause]) Feature Guide References 2.20.1 Message Waiting VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA Service Mode. Value Range Max.
Page 514 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Others—Call Waiting on VM Group Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DTMF) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent to any VM port.) Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence...
Page 515: Pbx Configuration-[3-12-2] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Page 516: Pbx Configuration-[3-12-2] Group-Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings-Member List
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Page 517: Pbx Configuration-[4] Extension
Section 12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 518: Pbx Configuration-[4-1] Extension-Wired Extension
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned. To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and click Find Next.
Page 519 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Telephone Type Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port (reference only). Value Range DPT (15V)/DPT (40V): DPT is connected. APT (15V): APT is connected. DSS: DSS Console is connected. VM: VPS is connected. ISDN-Extension: ISDN telephone is connected.
Page 520 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX. The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: Keeping PINs secret.
Page 521 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.5 Intercept Routing Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Feature Guide References 2.1.1.5 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time...
Page 522 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings CLIP Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a trunk call.
Page 523 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller’s telephone display when answering a call. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References...
Page 524 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 1 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Wireless XDP / Shared Extension Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established.
Page 525 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period. Value Range Max.
Page 526 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings W-OHCA: Voice from the handset Feature Guide References 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting 2.10.4.1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY Automatic C. Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a trunk, doorphone calls, and calls via an incoming call distribution group.
Page 527 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Off, On Feature Guide References 2.11.5 Data Line Security Option 3 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 528 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 16 characters Feature Guide References 2.20.2 Absent Message Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension cannot be used to make further trunk calls. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &...
Page 529 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call. Value Range No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups. ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
Page 530 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone LCS Recording Mode Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the extension’s mailbox when the extension user answers a call that was being monitored. Value Range Stop Record, Keep Record Feature Guide References...
Page 531 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information Incoming Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display. Value Range Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call.
Page 532 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Forced Automatic Answer Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and trunk calls) without going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting.
Page 533 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Paging Deny Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.17.1 Paging Option 7 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 534 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the extension that are retained in the extension’s Outgoing Call Log memory. Value Range 1–100 Feature Guide References 2.6.3 Last Number Redial ISDN Bearer...
Page 535 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Caller ID Sending Enables the extension to send Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.19.1 Caller ID Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after the previous unanswered call.
Page 536 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Option 9 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
Page 537 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.27.1 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY FWD / DND Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred. FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND.
Page 538 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References...
Page 539 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Keep ring after FWD NA to CO Specifies whether an extension continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination via FWD N/A or FWD Busy N/A. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References...
Page 540: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-1] Extension-Wired Extension-Extension Settings-Clip Generate
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings 12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 541 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 542: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-2] Extension-Wired Extension-Fwd/Dnd
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy the FWD/DND settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.
Page 543: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-3] Extension-Wired Extension-Speed Dial
12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each extension.
Page 544: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-4] Extension-Wired Extension-Flexible Button
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Overview Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84 flexible buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 545 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone. Value Range Automatic, Specific Feature Guide References 2.13.2 Call Park Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out...
Page 546 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic. Value Range Table 1–Table 8 Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
Page 547 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max.
Page 548 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Feature Guide References 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Extension Number (for Two-way Record) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the extension’s mailbox. Value Range Max.
Page 549 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified (reference only). Value Range Max. 20 characters Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled.
Page 550 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 12 characters Feature Guide References 2.21.2 Flexible Buttons Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range Table 1–Table 8 Feature Guide References...
Page 551 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview PC Programming Manual...
Page 552: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-4] Extension-Wired Extension-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected.
Page 553: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-5] Extension-Wired Extension-Pf Button
12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Page 554: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-6] Extension-Wired Extension-Ndss Link Data - Send
12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 555: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-7] Extension-Wired Extension-Clip Id Table
12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wired extension. Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the extension (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Page 556: Pbx Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message
12.1.8 PBX Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message 12.1.8 PBX Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each extension. This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
Page 557 12.1.8 PBX Configuration-[4-1-8] Extension-Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name Simplified Voice Message Specifies whether to enable the Simplified Voice Message feature. Value Range Enable, Disable Maximum SVM Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for the extension.
Page 558: Pbx Configuration-[4-2] Extension-Portable Station
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 128 PSs can be programmed. To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND and flexible button settings.
Page 559 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range 1–32 Feature Guide References 5.1.2 Group 5.1.3 Tenant Service Specifies the COS of the PS. Value Range 1–64 PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the PS.
Page 560 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Intercept Destination Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS.
Page 561 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.5 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.
Page 562 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—...
Page 563 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller’s telephone display when answering a call.
Page 564 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 1 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS.
Page 565 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Feature Guide References 2.12.1 Call Transfer ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for accounting and billing purposes.
Page 566 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker OHCA: If selected, a BSS notification will be received. W-OHCA: If selected, a BSS notification will be received. Feature Guide References 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting Automatic C.
Page 567 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 3 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS.
Page 568 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 16 characters Feature Guide References 2.20.2 Absent Message Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the PS. When this limit is reached, the PS cannot be used to make further trunk calls. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &...
Page 569 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call. Value Range No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups. ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
Page 570 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings LCS Recording Mode Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers a call that was being monitored. Value Range Stop Record, Keep Record Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Option 5 Extension Number...
Page 571 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information Option 6...
Page 572 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings SVM Lock Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other extensions. Value Range Unlock, Lock Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Option 7 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max.
Page 573 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory. Value Range 0–100 Feature Guide References 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log Memory...
Page 574 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call) Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Page 575 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings Feature Guide References...
Page 576 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No. Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max.
Page 577 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A PC Programming Manual References 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from Extension...
Page 578 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...
Page 579: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-1] Extension-Portable Station-Extension Settings-Clip Generate
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings 12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
Page 580 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) PC Programming Manual References 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References...
Page 581: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-2] Extension-Portable Station-Fwd/Dnd
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.
Page 582: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-3] Extension-Portable Station-Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
Page 583 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.13.2 Call Park Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from. Value Range None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to.
Page 584 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options is set to "Enable". Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring PC Programming Manual References...
Page 585 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Feature Guide References 2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are...
Page 586 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the UM/VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox. Value Range Max.
Page 587 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Feature Guide References 2.6.2 One-touch Dialling Dial (for ISDN Service) Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service. Value Range Max.
Page 588 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.13.2 Call Park Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Page 589: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-3] Extension-Portable Station-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button 12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.
Page 590: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-4] Extension-Portable Station-Ndss Link Data - Send
12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Page 591: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-5] Extension-Portable Station-Clip Id Table
12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wireless extension. Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Name Indicates the name of the PS (reference only).
Page 592: Pbx Configuration-[4-2-6] Extension-Portable Station-Simplified Voice Message
12.2.6 PBX Configuration-[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message 12.2.6 PBX Configuration-[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each PS. This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
Page 593 12.2.6 PBX Configuration-[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Value Range 0–100 Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) PC Programming Manual...
Page 594: Pbx Configuration-[4-3] Extension-Dss Console
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be programmed. The DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Extension—Port Property.
Page 595 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range 1–64 Feature Guide References 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone. Value Range Automatic, Specific Feature Guide References...
Page 596 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension. Value Range Feature Guide References 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Page 597 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max.
Page 598 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Extension Number (for Hurry-up) Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection). Value Range Max.
Page 599 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Extension Number (for SDN) Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to the SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function. Value Range Max.
Page 600 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console Feature Guide References 4.2.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range Feature Guide References 5.1.4 Time Service Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,...
Page 601: Pbx Configuration-[4-3] Extension-Dss Console-Dss Key Data Copy
12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy 12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS Console No./Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.
Page 602 12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy PC Programming Manual...
Page 603: Pbx Configuration-[5] Optional Device
Section 13 PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Optional Device menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 604: Pbx Configuration-[5-1] Optional Device-Doorphone
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed. To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 605 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Value Range 1–8 PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.18.1 Doorphone Call 5.1.3 Tenant Service Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make trunk calls, and sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions (Internal Call Block).
Page 606 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone Value Range 1–48 PC Programming Manual...
Page 607: Pbx Configuration-[5-2] Optional Device-External
13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager Settings for the external pager (external speaker) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View). Indicates the External Pager ID (reference only).
Page 608: Pbx Configuration-[5-3] Optional Device-Voice Message
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System 13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see "2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)"...
Page 609 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Value Range to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Busy Tone) DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any option from the menu. Value Range to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Reorder Tone) CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO...
Page 610 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect the end of the call. PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network...
Page 611 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Value Range Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to 4 times in the ranges of: = 100–1300 ms, 90 ms, 90 ms Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in DISA Cyclic Tone Option on this...
Page 612 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder PC Programming Manual...
Page 613: Pbx Configuration-[5-3-2] Optional Device-Voice Message-Disa Message
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 614 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message Value Range None, 1–64 PC Programming Manual References 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System Feature Guide References 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Fax Extension Specifies the extension number to which to transfer a call when a fax signal is detected. Value Range Max.
Page 615: Pbx Configuration-[5-3-3] Option Device-Voice Message-Svm
13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Option Device—Voice Message—SVM 13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Option Device—Voice Message—SVM Settings related to Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be specified. This feature can be accessed via the MPR card. SVM—Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number used to access the SVM feature. Value Range Max.
Page 616 13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Option Device—Voice Message—SVM Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX. When the tone sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-on.
Page 617 13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Option Device—Voice Message—SVM SLT Dial "*" Operation Mode Specifies the SLT dial "*" operation mode to avoid wrong DTMF signal detection from the SLT. If "Enable" is selected, you need to dial "*" before dialling. Value Range Enable, Disable Feature Guide References 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Page 618: Pbx Configuration-[5-4] Optional Device-External Relay
13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay Settings related to external relays can be programmed. Before programming these settings, For Output - Device Type must be set to "Relay" in the DOORPHONE card’s property settings. (® 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property) The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference.
Page 619 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— External Relay Access Feature Guide References 2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block 2.18.4 External Relay Control PC Programming Manual...
Page 620: Pbx Configuration-[5-5] Optional Device-External Sensor
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor Settings related to external sensors can be programmed. To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 621 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor PC Programming Manual References 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table Feature Guide References 2.18.3 External Sensor 5.1.3 Tenant Service Sensor Alarm—Email notification Enables e-mail notification when the sensor detects an alarm. Value Range Enable, Disable Feature Guide References 2.18.3 External Sensor 5.1.3 Tenant Service...
Page 622 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor PC Programming Manual...
Page 623: Pbx Configuration-[6] Feature
Section 14 PBX Configuration—[6] Feature This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 624: Pbx Configuration-[6-1] Feature-System Speed Dial
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should be automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution). The System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
Page 625 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 2.19.1 Caller ID CLI Destination Specifies the CLI destination (extension) to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone number are routed. If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used, the modified number must match the telephone number above (CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number) in order for the call to be routed correctly.
Page 626: Pbx Configuration-[6-2] Feature-Hotel & Charge
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set. Main Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators. Value Range Max.
Page 627 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8 Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension. The "%" character can be used in a message, and requires a number to be entered in its place when the message is selected from an extension.
Page 628 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Value Range Max. 12 characters Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—LCD for "Minibar" Specifies the name of charge item 2 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges.
Page 629 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Others" Specifies the name of charge item 3 as printed on the guest bill. Value Range Max. 12 characters Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR) Specifies the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing feature.
Page 630 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Charge Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%) Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill. Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Feature Guide References 2.22.3 Call Charge Services 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin &...
Page 631 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge PC Programming Manual References 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management Feature Guide References 2.21.4 Display Information 2.22.3 Call Charge Services 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Charge Options—Currency...
Page 632 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.22.3 Call Charge Services Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit Selects what happens when the amount of the call charge reaches the pre-programmed limit during a conversation. Value Range Alarm: Only a warning tone is heard. Alarm + Disconnect: A warning tone is heard, and then the call is disconnected.
Page 633: Pbx Configuration-[6-3] Feature-Verification Code
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters.
Page 634 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code COS Number Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code. Value Range 1–64 PC Programming Manual References 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS) Itemised Billing Code for ARS Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made with a verification code...
Page 635: Pbx Configuration-[6-4] Feature-Second Dial Tone
14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a pre-programmed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
Page 636: Pbx Configuration-[6-5] Feature-Absent Message
14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.
Page 637: Pbx Configuration-[6-6] Feature-Tenant
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant A maximum of 8 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources. To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Page 638 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant Same as System Setting: The setting specified in ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is applied. PC Programming Manual References 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 5.1.3 Tenant Service System Speed Dial Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant.
Page 639: Pbx Configuration-[7] Trs
Section 15 PBX Configuration—[7] TRS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 640: Pbx Configuration-[7-1] Trs-Denied Code
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).
Page 641: Pbx Configuration-[7-2] Trs-Exception Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).
Page 642: Pbx Configuration-[7-3] Trs-Special Carrier
15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each time a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the telephone number only.
Page 643: Pbx Configuration-[7-4] Trs-Emergency Dial
15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code—Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
Page 644: Pbx Configuration-[7-5] Trs-Miscellaneous
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or switch between TRS/Barring methods. TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.
Page 645 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a trunk call. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the programmed limit, the line will be disconnected. Value Range None, 1–7 Feature Guide References...
Page 646 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual...
Page 647: Pbx Configuration-[8] Ars
Section 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 648: Pbx Configuration-[8-1] Ars-System Setting
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.
Page 649: Pbx Configuration-[8-2] Ars-Leading Number
16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
Page 650: Pbx Configuration-[8-3] Ars-Routing Plan Time
16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time 16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 48 Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
Page 651: Pbx Configuration-[8-3] Ars-Routing Plan Time-Time Setting
16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting 16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins. Time-A–D—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Page 652: Pbx Configuration-[8-4] Ars-Routing Plan Priority
16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab.
Page 653: Pbx Configuration-[8-5] Ars-Carrier
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Carrier It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 48 different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature. Carrier Name Specifies the carrier name.
Page 654 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Carrier Access Code Specifies the carrier access code. The carrier access code can be added to the user-dialled number by specifying "C" in Modify Command on this screen. Value Range Max.
Page 655 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier Authorisation Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 8 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 5.1.3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 656: Pbx Configuration-[8-6] Ars-Leading Number Exception
16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is "on".
Page 657: Pbx Configuration-[8-7] Ars-Authorisation Code For Trg
16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier.
Page 658 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG PC Programming Manual...
Page 659: Pbx Configuration-[9] Private Network
Section 17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Private Network menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 660: Pbx Configuration-[9-1] Private Network-Tie Table
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
Page 661 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause]) Feature Guide References 4.2.1 TIE Line Service Trunk Group...
Page 662: Pbx Configuration-[9-2] Private Network-Network Data Transmission
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed. Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network DSS (NDSS) button.
Page 663 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)— IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator Feature Guide References 4.2.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data Transmission Counter Specifies the maximum number of "hops", or transmissions between two PBXs, before a packet of BLF data...
Page 664 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) Feature Guide References 4.2.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Timer Specifies the length of time between repeated re-transmission of network message waiting notifications.
Page 665: Pbx Configuration-[9-3] Private Network-Network Operator (Voip)
17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote PBX that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on this screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored ( Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8).
Page 666: Pbx Configuration-[9-4] Private Network-Ndss Key Table
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.
Page 667 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table Feature Guide References 4.2.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual...
Page 668: Pbx Configuration-[9-5] Private Network-Centralised Um/Vm Unit
17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit 17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit View and programme settings for using the Unified Messaging system and VPSs in a private network. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View).
Page 669: Pbx Configuration-[10] Co & Incoming Call
Section 18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call This section serves as reference operating instructions for the CO & Incoming Call menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 670: Pbx Configuration-[10-1] Co & Incoming Call-Co Line Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 trunk groups. The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Page 671: Pbx Configuration-[10-2] Co & Incoming Call-Dil Table & Port Settings
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations.
Page 672 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the DIL destination in each time mode. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References...
Page 673 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings VM Trunk Group No. Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) Group. The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Page 674 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 2.1.1.4 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution DDI/DID/TIE...
Page 675 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings Value Range DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls Feature Guide References 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) DDI/DID/TIE—Remove Digit Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DDI/DID distribution...
Page 676: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table.
Page 677 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming Manual References 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 4.2.1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number...
Page 678 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Value Range 1–48 CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode. Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 2.1.1.4 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution...
Page 679: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table-Automatic Registration
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 680 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed. If the same destination is to be used for all locations for a certain time mode, click the appropriate Same all check box.
Page 681: Pbx Configuration-[10-3] Co & Incoming Call-Ddi / Did Table-Name Generate
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Page 682 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate Name Prefix Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name. Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Name Suffix...
Page 683: Pbx Configuration-[10-5] Co & Incoming Call-Miscellaneous
18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination. Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.) Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.
Page 684 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual...
Page 685: Pbx Configuration-[11] Maintenance
Section 19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 686: Pbx Configuration-[11-1] Maintenance-Main
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main SMDR Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and outgoing calls. SMDR Format—Type Selects the format of SMDR output. Value Range Type A: 80 digits without call charge information Type B: 80 digits with call charge information Type C: 120 digits Feature Guide References...
Page 687 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Date Format Selects the printed date format. Value Range MM-DD-YY, DD-MM-YY, YY-MM-DD, YY-DD-MM Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Time Format (12H / 24H) Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format.
Page 688 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Intercom Call Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed. Value Range No Print, Print Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Log-in / Log-out Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed.
Page 689 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main PC Programming Manual References 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Print Information—Error Log Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR. Value Range No Print, Print Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Page 690 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Value Range None, Number, Name, Name + Number Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—Secret Dial Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial. The secret dial conceals all or part of the dialled number. Note that selecting Dial before ARS Modification in Option—ARS Dial on this screen indicates the dialled numbers as dots regardless of this setting.
Page 691 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Option—Condition Code "AN" Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—Caller ID Modification Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received (before being modified by the PBX) or after being modified.
Page 692 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main LAN—SMDR Password Specifies the password used to output the SMDR data via the LAN. Value Range Max. 10 characters Feature Guide References 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) LAN—New Line Code for Telnet Specifies the new line code for a terminal emulator. If the terminal emulator automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return).
Page 693 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Value Range 0–23 Feature Guide References 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Minute Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time. Value Range 0–59 Feature Guide References 5.6.4 Local Alarm Information Error Log for UM Port Busy—Detection of All UM Port Busy Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if UM ports were all busy specified in Detection of All UM Port Busy.
Page 694 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Value Range Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter Feature Guide References 4.2.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)
Page 695 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.5.2 PC Programming Remote—Remote Programming Enables system programming, diagnosis, and data upload from a remote location. Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 5.5.2 PC Programming Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked. Value Range None, 1–15 Feature Guide References...
Page 696 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main Feature Guide References 5.5.2 PC Programming System Password - PT Programming—Prog *#: Administrator Level Specifies the System password to authorise the PT user to access User Level programming. Value Range 4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Feature Guide References 5.5.2 PC Programming Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1...
Page 697: Pbx Configuration-[11-2] Maintenance-Pt Programming Access
19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT Programming Access 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT Programming Access The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified. 100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab. Program Number Indicates the programming item number (reference only).
Page 698: Pbx Configuration-[11-3] Maintenance-Air Synchronisation
19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation You can programme and view settings for Air Synchronisation Groups. Select an Air Synchronisation Group (1-4) to programme from the Air Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list. It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the air synchronisation group. Click Sort to reorder CSs with traditional CSs first, followed by IP-CSs.
Page 699 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Value Range 4-5: Main unit 2-3: Expansion Unit 9-12: Virtual Slot Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range 1–4 CS Name Indicates the name of the CS (reference only). Value Range Max. 20 characters Connection Indicates the port status.
Page 700 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Primary CS—Shelf Indicates the shelf number (reference only). Value Range 1: Main unit 2: Expansion Unit1 3: Expansion Unit2 4: Expansion Unit3 Primary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the primary CS (reference only). Value Range Slot number Primary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the primary CS (reference only).
Page 701 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation Value Range Slot number Secondary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the secondary CS (reference only). Value Range Port number Secondary CS—CS Name Indicates the name of the secondary CS (reference only). Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual...
Page 702 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Air Synchronisation PC Programming Manual...
Page 703: Um Configuration-[1] Mailbox Settings
Section 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 704: Um Configuration-[1] Mailbox Settings
20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings A maximum of 500 subscriber mailboxes can be created. Although the System Manager can use a telephone to create or edit mailboxes, the System Administrator can create several mailboxes at once using Web Maintenance Console.
Page 705 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting Feature Guide References 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview 3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.17 Mailbox Extension Specifies the extension number of the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension number including an Extension Group number can be assigned. Note If an Extension Group number is assigned to a mailbox, all group members are able to access the messages stored in the mailbox.
Page 706: Um Configuration-[1-2] Mailbox Settings-Full Setting
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Mailbox Number Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox number. The maximum number of digits that can be used for mailbox numbers is set in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Mailbox— Mailbox No.
Page 707 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual References 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service— Directory Listing Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Last Name Specifies the last name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory.
Page 708 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Mailbox Password (Message Client) Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client software programme. If a default password is programmed by an administrator, that password will be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes.
Page 709 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Covering Extension Forwards calls to a second extension when the first extension’s subscriber is not available to take the call. The Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call Handling options that can be enabled or disabled by the subscriber.
Page 710 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note This sequence has higher priority than the alternate extension transfer sequence specified in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—PBX Parameters— Environment—Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]). Value Range System, Other Note...
Page 711 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range System, Other (If "Other" is selected, specify 10–60 s) PC Programming Manual References 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification— Dialling Parameters—Call Transfer No Answer Time (10-60 s) Call Transfer Status Determines how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when it reaches the subscriber’s extension. Click Edit for the extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish.
Page 712 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the extension is busy. Click Edit for the extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish. Note •...
Page 713 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Telephone Device Specifies the Message Waiting Notification schedule for each device. The following parameters can be specified for devices 1, 2, and 3. Click Edit for the extension to change, set Device Notification for Unreceived Message to "Yes", and programme the settings, then click OK to finish.
Page 714 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Busy Delay Time (min) Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when the called device is busy. Value Range 0–120 min Feature Guide References 3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device No.
Page 715 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Interval Time between Device 1, 2, 3 and Next Device Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting Notification to Device 1, 2, or 3 before sending notification to the next device.
Page 716 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Yes, No Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order Specifies the format of the title of the notification. Value Range Title-ID-Name, Title-Name-ID, ID-Title-Name, Name-Title-ID, ID-Name-Title, Name-ID-Title Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No.
Page 717 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the voice message to the notification e-mail. Value Range Yes, No Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No.
Page 718 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting See related explanation in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt. Note If set to "Selective" and the receiver uses a rotary telephone, the no-entry selection is specified by 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group—...
Page 719 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Note The delay time must be shorter than the New Message Retention Time, or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded. Value Range 00:00–99:59 Feature Guide References 3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent Specifies whether only urgent messages are forwarded.
Page 720 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Date and time Feature Guide References 3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding Personal Custom Service Specifies the Personal Custom Service. The System Administrator can assign an operation to each key. Note • These settings can be changed by subscribers. •...
Page 721 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Outside Number #1–#4: Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , #, and special codes T: Dial Tone Detection , : Dial Pause (default 1 s) ; : Dial Pause (default 3 s) 0–9, , #: Dial Code Feature Guide References...
Page 722 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.14 Group Distribution Lists List 1 Members–List 4 Members Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the list. Follow the steps below to edit list members. Click Edit for a List Members item. Under Subscribers To Add, click the checkbox in No.
Page 723 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Auto Login Extension When this item is set to "Enable", subscribers are able to access their mailbox directly without entering the mailbox number. Subscribers can automatically log in from their extensions, by calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a telephone number assigned to a specified DID number or trunk.
Page 724 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Feature Guide References 3.2.2.2 Automatic Login Auto Login DDI/DID Specifies the DDI/DID number for Automatic Login. When the Unified Messaging system receives this DDI/ DID number from the PBX, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox. Note that this number must be unique for each mailbox.
Page 725 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Disable: Disables the Toll Saver feature. DID: Toll Saver functions when the system receives the pre-programmed DID number from the PBX. Caller ID: Toll Saver functions when Caller ID information is received that matches one of the pre-programmed numbers (Caller ID 1 or 2).
Page 726 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Subscriber Service - All Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of all messages in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in. Value Range Yes, No Subscriber Service - New Voice Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new voice messages in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in.
Page 727 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting Value Range Yes, No Message Client Display Language Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for the mail (IMAP) client. Value Range English, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian Quick Menu and Greeting Recording Quick Menu and Greeting Recording When this setting is enabled for the Message Manager mailbox, the following features are enabled for the Message Manager to access greeting and recording management menus quickly.
Page 728: Um Configuration-[1-3] Mailbox Settings-Auto Configuration
20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration Auto Configuration automatically associates extension numbers and mailboxes in bulk. This feature is available at the Installer level only. Select the following options Specifies Auto configuration mode from the following. Note In Re-create all mailboxes mode, all voice data is deleted, including data that is recorded in mailboxes.
Page 729: Um Configuration-[2] Class Of Service
Section 21 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 730: Um Configuration-[2] Class Of Service
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Each mailbox is assigned a Class of Service (COS) that determines the set of services that are available to its subscriber. There are 66 classes. Mailboxes can be assigned to their own or to the same COS as needed. COS No.
Page 731 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Tutorial The tutorial is a series of voice prompts for setting up the mailbox that is played to subscribers when they first log in to their mailbox. This item specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service hear a normal tutorial, a simplified tutorial, or no tutorial when they first log in to their mailbox.
Page 732 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device Desktop Messaging Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can access the contents of their mailboxes with an e-mail application using IMAP. This includes the Microsoft Outlook e-mail client plug-in.
Page 733 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Note This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager) and COS 66 (System Manager). Value Range 1–360 s Feature Guide References 3.2.2.22 Personal Greetings Message Length (Selection) Specifies if the length of messages left for subscribers in the Class of Service are unlimited in duration or have a specified time limit.
Page 734 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service New Message Retention Time (Limited) (days) Defines the number of days that new messages will remain in mailboxes for subscribers in the Class of Service. The storage period begins the day after the message reception. Only specified if New Message Retention Time (Selection) is set to "Limited".
Page 735 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Message Envelope Setting Specifies when message envelopes (message date and time, name of the person who recorded or transferred the message, telephone number of the caller) are announced. Value Range Before: The system announces the message envelope before playing the recorded message. After: The system announces the message envelope after playing the recorded message.
Page 736 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Feature Guide References 3.2.2.16 Live Call Screening (LCS) Delete Message Confirmation If set to "Yes", the system requests confirmation from subscribers in the Class of Service before erasing a message in the mailbox. If set to "No", the message is erased immediately. Value Range No, Yes Personal Greeting for Caller ID...
Page 737 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Autoplay New Message If set to "Yes", the system plays new messages automatically when subscribers in the Class of Service log into their mailboxes. Value Range No, Yes Play New Messages Sequentially If set to "Yes", the system plays all new messages for subscribers in the Class of Service sequentially without system prompts.
Page 738 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Announce Option Menu after Erasing Message If set to "Yes", the system plays the option menu after erasing a message for subscribers in the Class of Service. If set to "No", the system plays the next message automatically without playing the option menu. Value Range No, Yes New Message Length Announcement...
Page 739 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Call Transfer Intercom Paging Group Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to subscribers in the Class of Service. Note This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager). Value Range 1–32, ALL PC Programming Manual References 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Intercom Paging Parameters Use Call Waiting on Busy...
Page 740 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Call Transfer to Outside If set to "Yes", the system allows calls to be transferred to a trunk via the following features: Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call Transfer Service, Personal Custom Service, Call-through Service. Note This setting is not available for COS 65 (Message Manager).
Page 741 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service Personal Greeting Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change their Personal Greeting when accessing their mailbox. Note For the Personal Greeting of subscribers in a Class of Service with Hospitality mode enabled, only No Answer and Busy greetings can be set.
Page 742 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service 3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode Erase When Check Out - Owner Name Specifies if the Owner Name of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s extension is set to the "Check Out" status. Value Range No, Yes Feature Guide References...
Page 743: Um Configuration-[3] Um Extension / Trunk Service
Section 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Port/Trunk Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 744: Um Configuration-[3-1] Um Extension / Trunk Service-Service Group
22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group The parameters of Service Groups determine how calls are handled throughout the day. Each Service Group (therefore each port) can have a different call service for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). One of 5 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Custom Service or Transfer to Mailbox) can be assigned to each call service.
Page 745 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Note Mailbox numbers are between 2 digits and the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8). Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt Specifies the language of system prompts used by this call service. If set to "Primary", the default language which is selected from all installed languages will be used.
Page 746: Um Configuration-[3-2] Um Extension / Trunk Service-Port Assignment
22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment 22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment You can assign a Service Group created in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group to each UM port. For each UM port number, select a Service Group number (1–64) from the Service Group drop-down list. Click OK when finished.
Page 747: Um Configuration-[4] Service Settings
Section 23 UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 748: Um Configuration-[4-1] Service Settings-Caller Id / Pin Call Routing
23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing A maximum of 200 Caller ID/PIN numbers can be assigned so that callers are automatically forwarded to a pre-programmed destination. A different destination can be set for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). For Mode, select Caller-ID Mode or PIN Mode from the drop-down list, and then click the button to assign a routing destination.
Page 749 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Description Specifies a name and/or description of the Caller ID number. Note When no data is specified in this parameter, the caller’s name will be automatically entered here if the caller’s name is received from the telephone company.
Page 750 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Feature Guide References 3.2.1.35 PIN Call Routing Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break service Specifies the destination to which the call using an assigned PIN number is automatically forwarded. A destination can be set for each time mode.
Page 751: Um Configuration-[4-2] Service Settings-Parameters
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Automated Attendant Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s) Specifies the length of time the system waits for the caller to dial a digit before assuming the caller cannot input a DTMF signal and therefore activates No DTMF Input Call Coverage Value Range 0–20 s...
Page 752 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 3.2.1.34 Operator Service Operator Service—Operator’s Extension Specifies the extension number for Operator 1, 2, and 3 for the checked time setting. Note •...
Page 753 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.34 Operator Service Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode Specifies how to handle operator calls when they are not answered within the time period set in Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s). Value Range Caller Select: Allows the caller to leave a message or call another extension.
Page 754 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA) Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode If set to "Enable", callers on hold are informed of their current position in the call hold queue. Example: "One other person is waiting to connect." Value Range Enable, Disable Feature Guide References...
Page 755 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Changing the order of Alternate Extensions Select an extension and click Move up or Move down to change its order in the list. Alternate extensions will be dialled in order from top to bottom. Note Extension Groups and Logical Extensions cannot be assigned.
Page 756 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Mailbox: The caller is transferred to the designated mailbox extension. Extension: The caller is transferred to the designated extension. Feature Guide References 3.2.1.32 No DTMF Input Operation No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break (Parameter) Specifies the transfer destination if "Mailbox"...
Page 757 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters Value Range North American Standard, Australasian Standard Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name Name Directory Mode Specifies one of Last Name, First Name, or Both to be used when entering the name. Value Range Last, First, Both Feature Guide References 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name...
Page 758: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service
23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service A Custom Service allows callers to perform specific functions by pressing dial buttons on their telephones while listening to voice guidance (Custom Service Menu). Custom Services allow callers to connect themselves to an extension, mailbox, Mailbox Group, operator, fax machine, etc., without the assistance of an operator.
Page 759 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service [From the Custom Service Diagram] Double-click the desired Custom Service icon in the diagram, or right-click on the desired icon and select Edit. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box. Click OK. Example: Setting "Menu &...
Page 760: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Menu & Transfer
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This Custom Service type guides callers to press certain buttons to connect themselves with the designated party.
Page 761 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Call Transfer Anytime Specifies the type of dialling that the system accepts during the Custom Service in addition to the single-digit Custom Service options. This setting allows callers to dial numbers to connect themselves to an extension or mailbox or enter a PIN.
Page 762 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer No DTMF Input Operation Determines how calls are handled when callers do not dial any numbers after listening to the menu message (most likely because they are using rotary telephones) The default setting is "Operator", which allows the caller to be automatically connected to an operator after the menu message plays back ("Press the desired number, or stay on the line to be connected to an operator.").
Page 763 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer Example: Cancelling the setting for key [1] Clear the check box next to key [1]. Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 764: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Date Control
23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control 23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control The below parameters are set for the Date Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 time periods. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 765: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Time Control
23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control The below parameters are set for the Time Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 blocks of time during the day. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 766: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Day Control
23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control 23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service allows you to assign a different operation for each day of the week, and for all holidays. The caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Page 767: Um Configuration-[4-3] Service Settings-Custom Service-Password
23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password The below parameters are set for the Password Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder. This service requires that callers enter a password, followed by "#". Each password is assigned an operation. If a password is entered correctly, the caller is handled by the password’s pre-programmed operation.
Page 768 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service No DTMF Input Operation Determines how calls are handled when callers do not dial any numbers in response to system guidance (often because they are rotary telephone users). The default setting is "Operator", which allows the caller to be automatically connected to an operator after the message is played.
Page 769 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual...
Page 770: Um Configuration-[4-4] Service Settings-Holiday Table
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Holidays can be set for and assigned to trunks and Unified Messaging ports. When a call is received from a certain trunk or by a certain subscriber during the time frame set for an assigned holiday, the call handling settings for that holiday will be used.
Page 771 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Feature Guide References 3.2.1.20 Holiday Service Start Time Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to begin the holiday service. Click the cell to display an array of hours and minutes. Select an hour of the day and a minute of the hour to set the time. Value Range Hour and Minute Feature Guide References...
Page 772 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Value Range No, Yes Feature Guide References 3.2.1.20 Holiday Service Company Greeting No. Specify the greeting callers hear when calling the affected trunks or ports during the holiday. Value Range None (do not playback): No greeting is heard. No.
Page 773 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table Trunk Affected Specify which trunks will be subject to the holiday setting. Click Edit, and then select the check boxes for the trunks to be subject to the holiday setting, or select the All check box to apply the holiday to all trunks. Click OK to finish.
Page 774 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table PC Programming Manual...
Page 775: Um Configuration-[5] System Parameters
Section 24 UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Parameters menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 776: Um Configuration-[5-1] System Parameters-Mailbox Group
24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group Also called System Group Distribution Lists. Mailbox Groups allow a caller or subscriber to record a message and have it sent to several mailboxes. Messages sent to a Mailbox Group are sent to all subscribers in the group.
Page 777 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group Select the desired WAV file. Click Open to import the file. Click OK. Group List No. Specifies the Mailbox Group number. This number is similar to a mailbox number and is used to send a message to all subscribers of the group.
Page 778: Um Configuration-[5-2] System Parameters-Extension Group
24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group An Extension Group is a group of extensions that share a common mailbox. Each group has an Extension Group number. If the group number is assigned as the owner of a mailbox, then all members cannot be assigned their own personal mailboxes.
Page 779 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group Group Name Specifies the group name. Value Range Max. 32 characters Feature Guide References 3.2.1.18 Extension Group PC Programming Manual...
Page 780: Um Configuration-[5-3] System Parameters-System Caller Name Announcement
24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Allows the System Administrator to store a maximum of 200 telephone numbers and record a caller name for each telephone number. The caller name is announced when playing a message in their mailbox from one of the pre-programmed callers, when the system transfers a call to the subscriber from one of the pre-programmed callers (Caller ID Screening), and when the system pages the subscriber by intercom (Intercom Paging).
Page 781 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement Click Open to import the file. Click OK. Caller-ID No. Assigns the telephone number for which the system announces the pre-recorded caller name to extension users. Value Range Max. 20 digits consisting of 0–9 Feature Guide References 3.2.1.10 Caller Name Announcement Description...
Page 782: Um Configuration-[5-4] System Parameters-Parameters
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Daily Hours Setting Clock Format Specifies the time format (12-hour or 24-hour). Note The selected time format (12-hour or 24-hour) affects the time format of reports as well as the time that appears in e-mail notifications for new messages.
Page 783 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Prompt Setting These settings are required when Multilingual Service is enabled. Primary Language Specifies the default language to be used when another language is not selected in the Multilingual Selection Menu. Value Range Guidance No. 1–8 Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service 3.2.1.41 System Prompts...
Page 784 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Language 1–5—DTMF Specifies the number to be input to select the language set for the current language selection number. Value Range None, 1–9 Feature Guide References 3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service 3.2.1.41 System Prompts Selection Menu Wait Time (0-20 s) Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to select a language by pressing the appropriate dial key.
Page 785 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range 0–10 s Feature Guide References 3.2.1.41 System Prompts System Guidance—System Guidance Specifies the parameters which vary depending on the language assigned as the System Guidance language. For each selection of this setting, related items within "System Guidance 1–8" can be set. Value Range Guidance No.
Page 786 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range POUND, HASH PBX Parameters Specifies how the system will initiate and control call transfers, setup outgoing calls, and control message waiting lamps on extensions. PBX Environment—Operator Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]) Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to an operator’s extension.
Page 787 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters , : Dial Pause (default 1 s) ; : Dial Pause (default 3 s) X: Extension Dialling 0–9, , #: Dial Code Feature Guide References 3.2.1.1 Alternate Extension Group Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification Dialling Parameters—Call Transfer No Answer Time (10-60 s) Specifies the length of time that the system waits before retrieving the transferred call when there is no answer at the destination extension.
Page 788 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Message Waiting Notification—System Callback No. (Up to 32 digits) Specifies a callback number to be displayed with text reports of messages waiting notifications. The system callback number is displayed when the caller does not enter his or her telephone number when prompted by the system.
Page 789 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Outgoing Call UM Extensions Specifies the Unified Messaging extensions for the External Message Delivery feature. Value Range UM port extension number PC Programming Manual References 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property Feature Guide References 3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service Message Length (1-6 min) Specifies the maximum length (in minutes) of messages recorded for the External Delivery Message.
Page 790 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Company Telephone No. (Up to 32 digits) Specifies the company’s telephone number. When the recipient has failed to retrieve the sender’s message because of he or she did not enter the correct password, the system announces the company’s telephone number to the caller.
Page 791 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual References 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting— Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting— Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Feature Guide References 3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging Caller Recorded Name Announce Mode Determines whether or not the system announces the caller’s name during paging.
Page 792 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Fax No Answer Time (5-60s) Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the system waits for the main or alternate fax extension to answer a fax call before taking other action, such as notifying the Fax Manager that the fax could not be received. Value Range 5–60 s Fax Manager Mailbox No.
Page 793 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Maximum Continuous Tone Time (0-60 s) Specifies the length of time the system waits when a continuous tone is detected before it disconnects the call. Value Range 0–60 s Maximum Cyclic Tone Time (0-60 s) Specifies the length of time the system waits when a cyclic tone is detected before it disconnects the call.
Page 794 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Outside Transfer Sequence—EFA Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N A]) Specifies the sequence the system uses to transfer calls to trunks using EFA (External Feature Access). This setting should match the settings of the PBX.
Page 795 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Outside Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Answer Mode Specifies the answering method the system uses to detect whether the destination party has answered the transferred trunk call. Value Range Guidance: The system plays the following guidance before connecting the line to the destination party: "You have a call.
Page 796 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes D: Disconnecting F: Flash (Recall) R: Ringback Tone Detection T: Dial Tone Detection , : Dial Pause for 1 s (default) ; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default) 0–9, , #: Dial Code Number of Digits in Telephone Number (1-20)
Page 797 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters Value Range Unlimited, Other Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device Maximum Message Length (Other) (1-30 min) Specifies the maximum length of voice messages sent as e-mail attachments. Note If you attach a voice message that is longer than this setting, surplus parts of the message may be discarded when sending the e-mail.
Page 798 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters PC Programming Manual...
Page 799: Um Configuration-[6] H/W Settings
Section 25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the H/W Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 800: Um Configuration-[6] H/W Settings
25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings 25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings Global Parameters Global parameters define the settings that affect integration with other PBX operations. Maximum Time to Wait for Dial Tone (500-20000 ms, *100 ms) Specifies the length of time that the system waits for dial tone detection. Value Range 5–200 (´...
Page 801: Um Configuration-[7] System Security
Section 26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 802: Um Configuration-[7] System Security
26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Manager Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times) Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered, when the System Manager or Message Manager tries to log in to the system using a telephone, before the call is disconnected. Value Range 1–99 times System Manager Access from Telephone...
Page 803 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Value Range Disable, Enable Feature Guide References 3.1.2.7 System Security Password for Message Manager (Up to 16 numeric digits) If "Enable" is selected in Message Manager Access from Telephone, assign a numerical password here for the Message Manager to login to the system. Value Range Max.
Page 804 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times) Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered before the system disconnects the call. In order to use this feature, Enable Login Failure Disconnection must be set to "Enable". Value Range 1–99 times Default Password for New Mailboxes...
Page 805: Network Service
Section 27 Network Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Network Service menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console. PC Programming Manual...
Page 806: Network Service-[1] Ip Address/Ports
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Basic Settings LAN Setting—DHCP Port Number Specifies the port number of the DHCP client. This parameter is only available for entering values when Obtain an IP address automatically is selected. Value Range 68, 1024–65535 LAN Setting—Obtain an IP address automatically/Use the following IP address...
Page 807 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Value Range 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254 DNS Setting—Port Number Specifies the port number of the DNS server. This parameter is only available for entering values when Obtain DNS server address automatically is selected. Value Range 53, 1024–65535 DNS Setting—Obtain DNS server address automatically/Use the following DNS server address Specifies whether to enable the DHCP server to assign DNS server address information automatically to the mother board, or to enter the information manually.
Page 808 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports DSP IP Setting—DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—IP Address Specifies the IP address of the DSP card. This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the following DSP IP address is selected. Value Range 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254 DSP IP Setting—DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card (reference only).
Page 809 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports Assigned IP Address—IP Address Indicates the assigned IP address of the mother board (reference only). Assigned IP Address—MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the mother board (reference only). Assigned IP Address—Subnet Mask Indicates the network mask address of the mother board (reference only). Assigned IP Address—Default Gateway Indicates the assigned IP address of the default gateway for the network (reference only).
Page 810: Network Service-[2] Server Feature
27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP 27.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP Settings for the DHCP Server can be programmed. DHCP Server DHCP Server Specifies if the DHCP server functions of the PBX are enabled or not. Value Range Disable, Enable Port number...
Page 811 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP IP Address Static Assignment MAC Address Specifies the MAC addresses of the MAC address/IP address pairs to be subject to static DHCP allocation. Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF IP Address Specifies the IP addresses of the MAC address/IP address pairs to be subject to static DHCP allocation. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 IP Address Assignment List...
Page 812: Network Service-[2-2] Server Feature-Ftp
27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP Settings for FTP server connections can be programmed. FTP Server Enables or disables the PBX’s FTP server function. Value Range Enable, Disable Connection Control—Control Port number Specifies the port number for connecting to the PBX’s FTP server. Value Range 21, 1024–65535 Data Transfer Port—Port number (Minimum)
Page 813 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP Note Be sure to change the password from its initial, default value. Also, for security reasons, change the password regularly. Value Range Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9, [hyphen], [underscore]) Note The first character must be a letter or number. PC Programming Manual...
Page 814: Network Service-[2-4] Server Feature-Http
27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP 27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP HTTP server settings can be programmed. HTTP (LAN)—Port number Specifies the port number for HTTP connections using the LAN ports. This port is used for accessing the PBX for Web Maintenance Console programming. Value Range 80, 1024–65535 Automatic logout Timer (min)
Page 815: Network Service-[2-5] Server Feature-Ntp
27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP 27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP NTP server settings for use with KX-UT series SIP phones can be programmed. NTP server Enables or disables NTP service with the PBX’s NTP server for connected KX-UT series SIP phones. When this feature is enabled, the PBX will report to connected KX-UT series SIP phones the information obtained from the SNTP server specified in 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date &...
Page 816: Network Service-[2-6] Server Feature-Smtp
27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Settings for SMTP for sending e-mail for PBX functions can be programmed. Mail sending—Mail sender information name Specifies the name to be used as the sender of the e-mails from the PBX. Value Range Max.
Page 817 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP Value Range Max. 64 characters POP Before SMTP—POP before SMTP Specifies whether POP before SMTP is enabled on the SMTP server. Value Range Enable, Disable POP Before SMTP—POP server address Specifies the IP address or host name of the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max.
Page 818: Network Service-[2-7] Server Feature-Imap4
27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 Settings for IMAP4 server functions for the PBX can be programmed. IMAP4—IMAP4 server Specifies whether to enable the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX. Value Range Enable, Disable IMAP4—Port number Specifies a port number for the IMAP server.
Page 819: Network Service-[3] Client Feature
27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP 27.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP FTP client connection settings can be programmed. Up to 5 FTP sites can be specified for connections. Connection 1—Connection 5 Connection Name Specifies the name of the connection to use for programming in other items. Value Range Max.
Page 820 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP Value Range Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9, =, [hyphen], [underscore]) Note The first character must be a letter, number, or =. PC Programming Manual...
Page 821: Network Service-[3-2] Client Feature-Syslog
27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog 27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog Settings can be programmed for a Syslog client connection. Remote Syslog Specifies whether an external Syslog server will be used with the PBX. Value Range Enable, Disable Remote Syslog server—IP address / Host name Specifies the IP address or host name of the external Syslog server.
Page 822: Network Service-[3-3] Client Feature-Snmp Agent
27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general system activity. The related PBX system settings can be programmed.
Page 823 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent MIB info—SysName Specifies the administrative name for the system. Value Range Max. 255 characters Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor MIB info—SysLocation Specifies the physical location for the system. Value Range Max.
Page 824 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Trap port Specifies a port number used to send trap messages from the agent to an SNMP manager. Value Range 162, 1024–65535 Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor Community name Specifies a community name of an SNMP manager.
Page 825 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor PC Programming Manual...
Page 826: Network Service-[4] Other
27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security 27.4 Network Service—[4] Other 27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security Network security settings can be programmed. ICMP Echo Reply—LAN Port Specifies if the LAN port will send ICMP echo-replies to incoming ICMP echo-requests. Value Range Enable, Disable ICMP Echo Reply—Log Output Specifies if the PBX logs ICMP echo-replies.
Page 827: Network Service-[4-2] Other-Nas
27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS 27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS NAS settings can be programmed. NAS Status Displays/changes the connection status of the NAS. Value Range Connected, Disconnected To change the connection status of the NAS, perform the following: • Click Disconnect to set the NAS to disconnect status. •...
Page 828 27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS CIFS Setting—User Name Specifies the NAS connection user name when NAS Setting—Protocol is set to CIFS. Value Range Max. 24 characters (multi-byte characters allowed) CIFS Setting—Password Specifies the NAS connection password when NAS Setting—Protocol is set to CIFS. Value Range Max.
Page 829: Feature Programming References
Feature Programming References PC Programming Manual...
Page 830 Feature Programming References Absent Message • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Absent Message Set / Cancel • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message • 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message Feature Guide References 2.20.2 Absent Message Account Code Entry...
Page 831 Feature Programming References • 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message— Fax Extension Feature Guide References 2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer Automatic Route Selection (ARS) • 6.5 Tool—Import – ARS - Leading Digit – ARS - Except Code – ARS - Routing Plan •...
Page 832 Feature Programming References Budget Management • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit • 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management • 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge— Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit Feature Guide References...
Page 833 Feature Programming References – Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%) – Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%) Feature Guide References 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Call Charge Services • 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate • 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type •...
Page 834 Feature Programming References Call Forwarding (FWD) • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— FWD No Answer Timer Set • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings – CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO – Manager— Group Forward Set – Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension •...
Page 835 Feature Programming References • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 2.10.3 Call Monitor Call Park • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters – Recall—Call Park Recall (s) – Recall—Disconnect after Recall (x60s) • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—...
Page 836 Feature Programming References • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Transfer Recall Destination Feature Guide References 2.12.1 Call Transfer Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN • 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY Feature Guide References 4.1.2.6 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN...
Page 837 Feature Programming References • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings – Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call – Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting – Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings – Option 2—...
Page 838 Feature Programming References Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) • 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port – CO Setting— Subscriber Number – Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY •...
Page 839 Feature Programming References Centralised Voice Mail • 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG • 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission – Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter – Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Timer •...
Page 840 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 4.2.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Dial Information (CTI) • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 6 (CTI) Feature Guide References 2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Conference •...
Page 841 Feature Programming References – Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from DOORPHONE – Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call – Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference – Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference –...
Page 842 Feature Programming References – Tenant Number – UM Service Group No. – VM Trunk Group No. Feature Guide References 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID (s) •...
Page 843 Feature Programming References • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5 – Display Language – Incoming Call Display – Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 5 – Display Language – Incoming Call Display –...
Page 844 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.18.2 Door Open Doorphone Call • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf – Doorphone—Call Ring Duration (x10s) – Doorphone—Call Duration (x10s) • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— DOORPHONE Call •...
Page 845 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.24.3.2 Enhanced Walking Extension Executive Busy Override • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel • 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Executive Busy Override • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive –...
Page 846 Feature Programming References • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Feature Guide References 2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) External Feature Access (EFA) • 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Flash Time •...
Page 847 Feature Programming References • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type Feature Guide References 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate Flexible Buttons • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode (s) • 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button •...
Page 848 Feature Programming References • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1 – PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED – PT Fwd / DND—DND LED – PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND •...
Page 849 Feature Programming References • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options – Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after – Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer – Option 4— Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings –...
Page 850 Feature Programming References • 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting Incoming Call Distribution Group Features • 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings – Main – Overflow Queuing Busy – Overflow No Answer –...
Page 851 Feature Programming References • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer Feature Guide References 4.1.2 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features Intercept Routing • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s) •...
Page 852 Feature Programming References • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— • 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone— • 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay— COS Number Feature Guide References 2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block Internal Call Features •...
Page 853 Feature Programming References 4.2.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) Last Number Redial • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone – Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter – Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval (x10s) – Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration (x10s) •...
Page 854 Feature Programming References • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing Preferred Line Feature Guide References 2.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing Local Alarm Information • 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log • 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type •...
Page 855 Feature Programming References • 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table— Own PBX Code Feature Guide References 4.2.1.1 Making a TIE Line Call Malicious Call Identification (MCID) • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— MCID Feature Guide References 4.1.2.8 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) Manager Features •...
Page 856 Feature Programming References • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button – Type – Dial (for NDSS) • 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send • 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission • 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) •...
Page 857 Feature Programming References • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button – Type – Dial (for One-touch) Feature Guide References 2.6.2 One-touch Dialling Operator Features • 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night •...
Page 858 Feature Programming References 2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature Paging • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features – Group Paging – Group Paging Answer – Paging Deny Set / Cancel • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options – Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension –...
Page 859 Feature Programming References Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection • 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT—Port Property— P2P Group • 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT—Port Property • 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8 – P2P Group—Priority Voice 1/Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3 – P2P Group—Video Conference •...
Page 860 Feature Programming References • 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG Feature Guide References 4.2.5 QSIG Enhanced Features Queuing Feature • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue Monitor • 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings – Overflow Queuing Busy –...
Page 861 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Room Status Control • 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge – Main— Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 – Bill— Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest Feature Guide References 2.23.2 Room Status Control Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor...
Page 862 Feature Programming References – UT Extension—SIP Register Expire Time (s) – UT Extension—PERIODIC Ability – UT Extension—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time (s) – Option—NAT - RTP IP Address – Option—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address – Option—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address –...
Page 863 Feature Programming References Speed Dialling—Personal/System • 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features – System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling – Personal Speed Dialling - Programming • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System Speed Dialling • 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial •...
Page 864 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.22.1.2 Syslog Record Management Tenant Service • 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM – PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night – BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold • 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table • 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table •...
Page 865 Feature Programming References • 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table • 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings – DIL— Trunk Property – DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night – DDI/DID/TIE • 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table— DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References...
Page 866 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.24.4 Timed Reminder Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS – TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night – TRS Level for System Speed Dialling • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— •...
Page 867 Feature Programming References Trunk Adaptor Connection • 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property – Trunk Adaptor – Connection Attribute – Channel Attribute • 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW—Port Property – Trunk Adaptor – Connection Attribute Feature Guide References 5.3.1 Trunk Adaptor Connection Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) •...
Page 868 Feature Programming References Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/ Personal Custom Serv – Auto Forwarding Active – Auto Forwarding Mailbox Number – Auto Forwarding Delay Time – Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent – Auto Forwarding Mode –...
Page 869 Feature Programming References – Auto Login Toll Saver Feature Guide References 3.2.2.2 Automatic Login Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager • 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List – Internal Call – External Call – Supervisor – Mailbox Number Feature Guide References 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager Unified Messaging—Call Services •...
Page 870 Feature Programming References • 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification— Message Waiting Notification—System Callback No. (Up to 32 digits) Feature Guide References 3.2.2.8 Callback Number Entry Unified Messaging—Caller ID Call Routing • 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing Feature Guide References 3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing Unified Messaging—Caller ID Callback...
Page 871 Feature Programming References Unified Messaging—Covering Extension • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Covering Extension Feature Guide References 3.2.1.14 Covering Extension Unified Messaging—Custom Service • 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service Feature Guide References 3.2.1.15 Custom Service Unified Messaging—Custom Service Builder •...
Page 872 Feature Programming References – External Message Delivery Active – External Message Delivery Prompt Mode • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— Extension • 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery Feature Guide References 3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service Unified Messaging—Group Distribution Lists •...
Page 873 Feature Programming References Unified Messaging—Incomplete Call Handling Service • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters – Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer – Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Feature Guide References 3.2.2.15 Incomplete Call Handling Service Unified Messaging—Intercept Routing to a Mailbox •...
Page 874 Feature Programming References Unified Messaging—Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox) • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters— All Calls Transfer to Mailbox Feature Guide References 3.2.1.26 Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox) Unified Messaging—Mailbox • 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports •...
Page 875 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Lamp • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters— Message Waiting Lamp Feature Guide References 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters –...
Page 876 Feature Programming References Unified Messaging—Operator Service • 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters – Operator Service – Operator Service—Operator’s Extension – Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox – Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode – Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode –...
Page 877 Feature Programming References Unified Messaging—Port Service • Section 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service Feature Guide References 3.2.1.37 Port Service Unified Messaging—Remote Call Forwarding Set • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service— Remote Call Telephone Number 1, 2 Feature Guide References 3.2.2.26 Remote Call Forwarding Set Unified Messaging—Subscriber Tutorial...
Page 878 Feature Programming References – Auto Login Extension – Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement – Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2 – Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement – Auto Login DDI/DID – Auto Login TRG No. – Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement –...
Page 879 Feature Programming References – Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages – E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages • 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/ Personal Custom Serv— Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent •...
Page 880 Feature Programming References – Option 3— Charge Limit • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings – Option 1— ARS Itemised Code – Option 3— Charge Limit • 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code Feature Guide References 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry VIP Call •...
Page 881 Feature Programming References – Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer) – Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Recording Mode • 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button – Type – Extension Number (for Two-way Record) –...
Page 882 Feature Programming References Voice Mail Integration • 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall (s) • 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings • 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4 –...
Page 883 Feature Programming References • 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension • 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension • 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Feature Guide References 2.7.5 Walking COS Walking Extension Features •...
Page 884 This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2014...

Panasonic KX-NS300CN Pc Programming Manual

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Panasonic KX-NS300CN

Summary of Contents for Panasonic KX-NS300CN